background image

L(NA)06051ENG-F(1801)MEE

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

Mitsubishi  Electric  Corporation  Nagoya  Works  is  a  factory  certified  for  ISO14001  (standards  for 
environmental management systems) and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems).

• Top level of driving performance in compact body

• Easy operability

• Extensive option lineup

• Ensured maintenance

• Compact and space-saving

• Supporting various applications

INVERTER

FR-E700

All-rounder with a compact body
  (Addition of Ethernet communication function models)

FACTORY AUTOMATION


background image

4

9

10

14

23

35

39

48

71

72

87

92

97

99

Contents

3

2

GLOBAL IMPACT OF

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.

We  bring  together  the  best  minds  to 
create  the  best  technologies.  At 
Mitsubishi  Electric,  we  understand 
that technology is the driving force of 
change  in  our  lives.  By  bringing 
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing  the  efficiency  of  businesses  and 
keeping  things  running  across 
society, we integrate technology and 
innovation  to  bring  changes  for  the 
better.

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

Energy and Electric Systems
A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.

Electronic Devices
A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.

Home Appliance
Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
ment systems.

Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.

Industrial Automation Systems
Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.

Features

Connection example

Standard Specifications

Outline Dimensions

Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications

Operation panel, Parameter unit, FR Configurator

Parameter List

Explanations of Parameters

Protective Functions

Option and Peripheral Devices

Precautions for Operation/Selection, Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection

Application to Motor

FR-E500 Series Compatibility

Warranty

Global Player


background image

4

9

10

14

23

35

39

48

71

72

87

92

97

99

Contents

3

2

GLOBAL IMPACT OF

MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC

Through Mitsubishi Electric’s vision, “Changes for the Better“ are possible for a brighter future.

We  bring  together  the  best  minds  to 
create  the  best  technologies.  At 
Mitsubishi  Electric,  we  understand 
that technology is the driving force of 
change  in  our  lives.  By  bringing 
greater comfort to daily life, maximiz-
ing  the  efficiency  of  businesses  and 
keeping  things  running  across 
society, we integrate technology and 
innovation  to  bring  changes  for  the 
better.

Mitsubishi Electric is involved in many areas including the following

Energy and Electric Systems
A wide range of power and electrical products from generators to large-scale displays.

Electronic Devices
A wide portfolio of cutting-edge semiconductor devices for systems and products.

Home Appliance
Dependable consumer products like air conditioners and home entertain-
ment systems.

Information and Communication Systems
Commercial and consumer-centric equipment, products and systems.

Industrial Automation Systems
Maximizing productivity and efficiency with cutting-edge automation technology.

Features

Connection example

Standard Specifications

Outline Dimensions

Terminal Connection Diagram, Terminal Specifications

Operation panel, Parameter unit, FR Configurator

Parameter List

Explanations of Parameters

Protective Functions

Option and Peripheral Devices

Precautions for Operation/Selection, Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection

Application to Motor

FR-E500 Series Compatibility

Warranty

Global Player


background image

The inverter became more powerful.

1

Top level of driving performance in compact body

(1) High torque 200%/0.5Hz is realized by Advanced magnetic flux vector control (3.7K or lower) 

By the advancement of General-purpose magnetic flux vector 
control to Advanced magnetic flux vector control, top level of 
driving performance became possible. Since V/F control and 
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control operations are 
available, operation after replacement of the conventional model 
(FR-E500 series) is ensured. 

For the 5.5K to 15K, 150%/0.5Hz torque is realized. 

Excellent usability

Usability was thoroughly pursued.

2

Easy setting with the Mitsubishi Electric setting dial.

Displayed numbers can be jumped by turning the setting dial quickly, and numbers can 

be changed one by one by turning it slowly, enabling speedy parameter setting.

The nonslip setting dial is easier to turn.

(1) Improved setting dial 

Press        and        button 
simultaneously (0.5s).

Turn             to select 
operation method.

Press        to set.

According to the desired command sources for start frequency and speed, Pr.79 can be set in simple steps.

(2) Easy setting mode 

Setting

complete

An USB connector (mini-B connector) is provided as standard. The inverter can be easily connected without a USB-RS-485 converter.
Wizard (interactive) function of FR Configurator (inverter setup software) provides setting support. 
In addition, a high-speed graph function with USB enables high speed sampling display.

(3) With a provided USB connector, setting is easily done from 

 

a personal computer using FR Configurator

Inverter

FR Configurator

Acceleration/deceleration

pattern setting

Acceleration/deceleration

time setting

Parameter list display

Expanded advanced
operability with USB
and FR Configurator

High speed graph function

USB cable

Mini-B

connector

Setting wizard function (example: acceleration/deceleration time setting)

Optional enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) can 
be connected. 
In addition, an operation panel for conventional model 
(FR-E500 series) can be connected.

(5) Parameter unit FR-PU07/

  FR-PU07BB(-L) (option) 

The FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L), an optional parameter unit, can 
be connected as well.

A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20    ) is separately 
required. (Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB203 (3m) is 
enclosed with FR-PU07BB(-L).)

Setting such as direct input method with a numeric keypad, 
operation status indication, and help function are useful. 
The display language can be selected from 8 languages.

Parameter settings of maximum of three inverters can be stored. 

A battery pack type (FR-PU07BB(-L)) allows parameter setting 
and parameter copy without power-ON the inverter. 

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Operation method

Panel display

Start command Speed command Monitor

LED

RUN button

External terminal

STF/STR

External terminal

STF/STR

Setting dial

RUN button

PU

Blinking

Blinking

Blinking

ON

Blinking

ON

EXT

PU

EXT

PU

EXT

PU

EXT

1

-

9

7

2

-

9

7

3

-

9

7

4

-

9

7

Analog voltage

 input

Setting dial

Analog voltage

 input

Blinking

Blinking

           and
blink

(4) Enclosure surface operation panel 

  FR-PA07 (option)

Blinking

Blinking

The operation panel of the inverter cannot be removed. 
A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20    ) is 
separately required.

To use a parameter unit with battery pack outside Japan, order the FR-PU07BB-L 
(model indicated with "L" at the end).

Many kinds of three phase induction motors can be optimally 
controlled with Mitsubishi Electric's original "non-rotation" auto 
tuning function. High precision tuning is enabled even when a test 
operation of a machine cannot be performed at parameter 
adjustment.

Advanced auto tuning

Short time overload capacity is increased to 200% 3s (200% 0.5s for 
the conventional model). Overcurrent trip is less likely to occur.

Improved torque limit/current limit function provides a machine 
protection, load limit, and stop-on-contact operation. 

(2) Short time overload capacity 

 

is increased (200% 3s) 

(3) Torque limit/current limit function

Using the torque limit function, machine 
breakage from overload can be avoided. 
For example, edge chipping of a tool can be avoided. 

When a bogie runs over a bump, the impact can 
be beared by this function.

Speed/torque characteristics example

FR-E720-3.7K (SC) (NF) (NC) (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)

SF-JR 4P 3.7kW

-200%

-100%

0

100%

200%

500

1000

3Hz

30Hz

60Hz

Speed (r/min)

1500

2000

Load 

torque (%)

Advanced magnetic flux vector control is ideal 
for a lift in an automated-storage system which 
requires high torque at low speed.

(4) Improved regeneration capability

A brake transistor is built-in to the 0.4K to 15K. 
Connecting an optional brake resistor increases regeneration 
capability.

Features

Standard 

  Specifications

Outline 

  Dimension 
  Drawings

Terminal Connection 

  Diagram

Terminal Specification 

  Explanation

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter List

Explanations 

  of Parameters

Protective 

  Functions

Option and 

  Peripheral Devices

Precautions for 

  Operation/Selection

Precautions for Peripheral 

  Device Selection

Application 

  to Motor

Warranty

Main Differences and 

  Compatibilities with 
  the FR-E500 Series

Service

International FA Center

Connection

  example

5

4


background image

The inverter became more powerful.

1

Top level of driving performance in compact body

(1) High torque 200%/0.5Hz is realized by Advanced magnetic flux vector control (3.7K or lower) 

By the advancement of General-purpose magnetic flux vector 
control to Advanced magnetic flux vector control, top level of 
driving performance became possible. Since V/F control and 
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control operations are 
available, operation after replacement of the conventional model 
(FR-E500 series) is ensured. 

For the 5.5K to 15K, 150%/0.5Hz torque is realized. 

Excellent usability

Usability was thoroughly pursued.

2

Easy setting with the Mitsubishi Electric setting dial.

Displayed numbers can be jumped by turning the setting dial quickly, and numbers can 

be changed one by one by turning it slowly, enabling speedy parameter setting.

The nonslip setting dial is easier to turn.

(1) Improved setting dial 

Press        and        button 
simultaneously (0.5s).

Turn             to select 
operation method.

Press        to set.

According to the desired command sources for start frequency and speed, Pr.79 can be set in simple steps.

(2) Easy setting mode 

Setting

complete

An USB connector (mini-B connector) is provided as standard. The inverter can be easily connected without a USB-RS-485 converter.
Wizard (interactive) function of FR Configurator (inverter setup software) provides setting support. 
In addition, a high-speed graph function with USB enables high speed sampling display.

(3) With a provided USB connector, setting is easily done from 

 

a personal computer using FR Configurator

Inverter

FR Configurator

Acceleration/deceleration

pattern setting

Acceleration/deceleration

time setting

Parameter list display

Expanded advanced
operability with USB
and FR Configurator

High speed graph function

USB cable

Mini-B

connector

Setting wizard function (example: acceleration/deceleration time setting)

Optional enclosure surface operation panel (FR-PA07) can 
be connected. 
In addition, an operation panel for conventional model 
(FR-E500 series) can be connected.

(5) Parameter unit FR-PU07/

  FR-PU07BB(-L) (option) 

The FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L), an optional parameter unit, can 
be connected as well.

A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20    ) is separately 
required. (Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB203 (3m) is 
enclosed with FR-PU07BB(-L).)

Setting such as direct input method with a numeric keypad, 
operation status indication, and help function are useful. 
The display language can be selected from 8 languages.

Parameter settings of maximum of three inverters can be stored. 

A battery pack type (FR-PU07BB(-L)) allows parameter setting 
and parameter copy without power-ON the inverter. 

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Evolution in all functions

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Easy/powerful compact inverter

Operation method

Panel display

Start command Speed command Monitor

LED

RUN button

External terminal

STF/STR

External terminal

STF/STR

Setting dial

RUN button

PU

Blinking

Blinking

Blinking

ON

Blinking

ON

EXT

PU

EXT

PU

EXT

PU

EXT

1

-

9

7

2

-

9

7

3

-

9

7

4

-

9

7

Analog voltage

 input

Setting dial

Analog voltage

 input

Blinking

Blinking

           and
blink

(4) Enclosure surface operation panel 

  FR-PA07 (option)

Blinking

Blinking

The operation panel of the inverter cannot be removed. 
A parameter unit connection cable (FR-CB20    ) is 
separately required.

To use a parameter unit with battery pack outside Japan, order the FR-PU07BB-L 
(model indicated with "L" at the end).

Many kinds of three phase induction motors can be optimally 
controlled with Mitsubishi Electric's original "non-rotation" auto 
tuning function. High precision tuning is enabled even when a test 
operation of a machine cannot be performed at parameter 
adjustment.

Advanced auto tuning

Short time overload capacity is increased to 200% 3s (200% 0.5s for 
the conventional model). Overcurrent trip is less likely to occur.

Improved torque limit/current limit function provides a machine 
protection, load limit, and stop-on-contact operation. 

(2) Short time overload capacity 

 

is increased (200% 3s) 

(3) Torque limit/current limit function

Using the torque limit function, machine 
breakage from overload can be avoided. 
For example, edge chipping of a tool can be avoided. 

When a bogie runs over a bump, the impact can 
be beared by this function.

Speed/torque characteristics example

FR-E720-3.7K (SC) (NF) (NC) (Advanced magnetic flux vector control)

SF-JR 4P 3.7kW

-200%

-100%

0

100%

200%

500

1000

3Hz

30Hz

60Hz

Speed (r/min)

1500

2000

Load 

torque (%)

Advanced magnetic flux vector control is ideal 
for a lift in an automated-storage system which 
requires high torque at low speed.

(4) Improved regeneration capability

A brake transistor is built-in to the 0.4K to 15K. 
Connecting an optional brake resistor increases regeneration 
capability.

Features

Standard 

  Specifications

Outline 

  Dimension 
  Drawings

Terminal Connection 

  Diagram

Terminal Specification 

  Explanation

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter List

Explanations 

  of Parameters

Protective 

  Functions

Option and 

  Peripheral Devices

Precautions for 

  Operation/Selection

Precautions for Peripheral 

  Device Selection

Application 

  to Motor

Warranty

Main Differences and 

  Compatibilities with 
  the FR-E500 Series

Service

International FA Center

Connection

  example

5

4


background image

Terminal 

card

Enhanced expandability

Mitsubishi Electric inverters offer the expandability that answers to every need

3

Compact and space saving

Compact design expands flexibility of enclosure design.

4

Easy servicing for peace of mind

The 700 series is the pioneer of long life and high reliability.

5

Full of useful functions

6

(1) A variety of plug-in options are mountable

Plug-in options supporting digital input, analog output extension, and a variety of communications provide extended functions which is 
almost equivalent to the FR-A700 series. (One type of plug-in option can be mounted.)

The design life of the cooling fan has been extended to 10 
years

*

1

. The life of the fan can be further extended utilizing the 

it’s ON/OFF control.

The design life of the capacitors has been extended to 10 years

*

1

*

2

 

by adopting a capacitor that endures about 5000 hours at 105°C 
surrounding air temperature.

(3) Control terminals are 

  selectable according to applications

(1) Compact body with high performance function

Installation size is the same as 
the conventional mode (FR-E500 
series) in consideration of 
intercompatibility. (7.5K or lower)

(2) Side by side installation saves space

Space can be saved by side by side 
no clearance installation

*

.

(4) Various kinds of networks are supported

EIA-485 (RS-485), MODBUS

®

RTU (equipped as standard), CC-Link, 

PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet™, LONWORKS

®

, EtherCAT

®

 (optional)

Network-compatible inverters, the CC-Link communication model (FR-E700-NC) 
and the FL remote communication model (FR-E700-NF), are also available.

A network compatible inverter, the Ethernet communication function 
model (FR-E700-NE) is now available. CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, 
MELSOFT / FA product connection and MODBUS/TCP supported.

(5) Environment-conscious filter options

Filterpack FR-BFP2 (the package of the power factor improving DC 
reactor, common mode choke, and capacitive filter) is available for 
compliance with the Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines.

A noise filter option for compliance with the EMC Directive 
(EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is also available.

(1) Long-life design

A cooling fan is provided on top of the 
inverter for all capacities requiring a 
cooling fan

*

Cooling fans can be easily replaced 
without disconnecting main circuit wires.

(3) Easy replacement of cooling fans

Wiring is easy as the wiring cover can be 
installed after wiring is complete.

(4) Combed shaped wiring cover

Wiring of the control circuit when replacing the same series 
inverter can be done by changing the terminal block.

(5) Removable control terminal block

Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit 
capacitor, and inrush current limit circuit can be monitored.

Trouble can be avoided with the self-diagnostic alarm

*

4

 that is 

output when the life span is near.

*4

: Any one of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit or 

cooling fan reaches the output level, an alarm is output.
Capacity of the main circuit capacitor can be measured by setting parameter at a stop and 
turning the power from off to on. Measuring the capacity enables an alarm to be output.

*

: The inverter may trip and the motor may coast depending on the load condition.

Detection of coasting speed (frequency search function) prevents the motor speed from 
decreasing at a restart, starting the motor smoothly with less output current.

*1

: Surrounding air temperature : annual average 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, 

oil mist, dust and dirt) Since the design life is a calculated value, it is not a guaranteed value.

*2

: Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current

*

: Cooling fans are equipped with models of 1.5K and 

above. (single phase 200V class 0.75K and above)

(2) Advanced life check function

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with 

frequency search

Brake sequence mode 

is useful for mechanical brake control of a lift.

Regeneration avoidance function 

prevents regenerative overvoltage in a pressing machine.

Main circuit power supply DC input 

can be connected to DC power supply.

Enhanced I/O terminal function 

supports switchover of analog input (voltage / current).

Password function 

is effective for parameter setting protection.

  and so on

Power-failure deceleration stop function/operation continuation 

at instantaneous power failure function
The motor can be decelerated to a stop when a power failure or 
undervoltage occurs to prevent the motor from coasting.
This function is useful to stop a motor at power failure as a fail 
safe of machine tool, etc.
With the new operation continuation function at instantaneous 
power failure, the motor continues running without coasting 
even if an instantaneous power failure occurs during operation.

Plug-in option
Plug-in option dedicated front cover

Compatible Plug-in Options

FR-A7AX (E kit) ... 16-bit digital input

FR-A7AY (E kit) ... Digital output

 

Extension analog output

FR-A7AR (E kit) ... Relay output

FR-E7DS ............ 24VDC input

*

1

FR-A7NC (E kit)  ... CC-Link

FR-A7ND (E kit)  ... DeviceNet

FR-A7NP (E kit) ... PROFIBUS-DP

FR-A7NL (E kit)  ... L

ON

W

ORKS

E7NECT_2P

*

2

...... EtherCAT

FR-E720-0.2K

FR-E520-0.2K

Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts

Components

Cooling fan

Main circuit smoothing capacitor

Printed board smoothing capacitor

Estimated lifespan of the FR-E700

10 years
10 years
10 years

Guideline of JEMA

*3

2 to 3 years

5 years
5 years

*3

: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association)

FR-E500 series

FR-E700 series

Input voltage

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output current

Input voltage

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output current

The FR-A7 E kit can be used for the standard control circuit terminal model only.
For the safety stop function model, use an FR-A7 and a separate dedicated front cover.

128mm

For the customers who need more than 
the standard terminals, the control 
terminal option, RS-485 2 port terminal 
block, is available.
A terminal card is removable and can be 
easily replaced from a standard terminal card.

*

: Use the inverter at the surrounding air temperature 

  of 40˚C or less.

[For the standard control circuit terminal model, order the FR-A7 E kit, which contains an option board FR-A7 and its dedicated front cover.] 

(2) Safety stop function (FR-E700-SC/NF/NC)

Spring clamp terminals are adopted as control circuit terminals.
Spring clamp terminals are highly reliable and can be easily wired. 

The FR-E700-SC series is compliant to the EU Machinery Directive 
without the addition of previously required external devices. 
Operation of an external Emergency Stop device results in a highly 
reliable immediate shutoff of the D700's output to the motor.
This safety stop function conforms to the following standards.

EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd
EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2

Provided by the user (present)

FR-D700

Safety function

is equipped

Emergency stop

Emergency stop

For conventional model...

Two MCs were necessary

For conventional model...

Two MCs were necessary

•High cost
•Maintenance of two MCs 
  was necessary
•Installation space was necessary

•Magnetic contactor (MC)
•Emergency stop wiring

Only one MC is recommended 

instead of two.

Although MC is not required 

for the safety stop function.

Only one MC is recommended 

instead of two.

Although MC is not required 

for the safety stop function.

•Cost reduction
•Maintenance of one MC
•Installation space is reduced

*

: Approved safety relay unit

*

Mitsubishi Electric 

magnetic contactors

•Offer a selection of small frames
•Offer a line-up of safety contactors

•Support with low-level load (auxiliary contact) 
•Support many international regulations as a standard model

Refer to page 85 for the selection. 

Enhanced functions for all sorts of applications

*1

: This option is available for the safety stop function model only. The dedicated front cover is enclosed with the option.

*2

: Manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB. (Only compatible with dedicated EtherCAT communication models)

Energy saving for fans and pumps

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) 
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.

Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)
With Optimum excitation control to achieve the highest motor efficiency, further energy saving can be achieved.

Refer to page 70

6

7

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel Parameter unit FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension Drawings


background image

Terminal 

card

Enhanced expandability

Mitsubishi Electric inverters offer the expandability that answers to every need

3

Compact and space saving

Compact design expands flexibility of enclosure design.

4

Easy servicing for peace of mind

The 700 series is the pioneer of long life and high reliability.

5

Full of useful functions

6

(1) A variety of plug-in options are mountable

Plug-in options supporting digital input, analog output extension, and a variety of communications provide extended functions which is 
almost equivalent to the FR-A700 series. (One type of plug-in option can be mounted.)

The design life of the cooling fan has been extended to 10 
years

*

1

. The life of the fan can be further extended utilizing the 

it’s ON/OFF control.

The design life of the capacitors has been extended to 10 years

*

1

*

2

 

by adopting a capacitor that endures about 5000 hours at 105°C 
surrounding air temperature.

(3) Control terminals are 

  selectable according to applications

(1) Compact body with high performance function

Installation size is the same as 
the conventional mode (FR-E500 
series) in consideration of 
intercompatibility. (7.5K or lower)

(2) Side by side installation saves space

Space can be saved by side by side 
no clearance installation

*

.

(4) Various kinds of networks are supported

EIA-485 (RS-485), MODBUS

®

RTU (equipped as standard), CC-Link, 

PROFIBUS-DP, DeviceNet™, LONWORKS

®

, EtherCAT

®

 (optional)

Network-compatible inverters, the CC-Link communication model (FR-E700-NC) 
and the FL remote communication model (FR-E700-NF), are also available.

A network compatible inverter, the Ethernet communication function 
model (FR-E700-NE) is now available. CC-Link IE Field Network Basic, 
MELSOFT / FA product connection and MODBUS/TCP supported.

(5) Environment-conscious filter options

Filterpack FR-BFP2 (the package of the power factor improving DC 
reactor, common mode choke, and capacitive filter) is available for 
compliance with the Japanese harmonic suppression guidelines.

A noise filter option for compliance with the EMC Directive 
(EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is also available.

(1) Long-life design

A cooling fan is provided on top of the 
inverter for all capacities requiring a 
cooling fan

*

Cooling fans can be easily replaced 
without disconnecting main circuit wires.

(3) Easy replacement of cooling fans

Wiring is easy as the wiring cover can be 
installed after wiring is complete.

(4) Combed shaped wiring cover

Wiring of the control circuit when replacing the same series 
inverter can be done by changing the terminal block.

(5) Removable control terminal block

Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit 
capacitor, and inrush current limit circuit can be monitored.

Trouble can be avoided with the self-diagnostic alarm

*

4

 that is 

output when the life span is near.

*4

: Any one of main circuit capacitor, control circuit capacitor, inrush current limit circuit or 

cooling fan reaches the output level, an alarm is output.
Capacity of the main circuit capacitor can be measured by setting parameter at a stop and 
turning the power from off to on. Measuring the capacity enables an alarm to be output.

*

: The inverter may trip and the motor may coast depending on the load condition.

Detection of coasting speed (frequency search function) prevents the motor speed from 
decreasing at a restart, starting the motor smoothly with less output current.

*1

: Surrounding air temperature : annual average 40˚C (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, 

oil mist, dust and dirt) Since the design life is a calculated value, it is not a guaranteed value.

*2

: Output current : 80% of the inverter rated current

*

: Cooling fans are equipped with models of 1.5K and 

above. (single phase 200V class 0.75K and above)

(2) Advanced life check function

Automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function with 

frequency search

Brake sequence mode 

is useful for mechanical brake control of a lift.

Regeneration avoidance function 

prevents regenerative overvoltage in a pressing machine.

Main circuit power supply DC input 

can be connected to DC power supply.

Enhanced I/O terminal function 

supports switchover of analog input (voltage / current).

Password function 

is effective for parameter setting protection.

  and so on

Power-failure deceleration stop function/operation continuation 

at instantaneous power failure function
The motor can be decelerated to a stop when a power failure or 
undervoltage occurs to prevent the motor from coasting.
This function is useful to stop a motor at power failure as a fail 
safe of machine tool, etc.
With the new operation continuation function at instantaneous 
power failure, the motor continues running without coasting 
even if an instantaneous power failure occurs during operation.

Plug-in option
Plug-in option dedicated front cover

Compatible Plug-in Options

FR-A7AX (E kit) ... 16-bit digital input

FR-A7AY (E kit) ... Digital output

 

Extension analog output

FR-A7AR (E kit) ... Relay output

FR-E7DS ............ 24VDC input

*

1

FR-A7NC (E kit)  ... CC-Link

FR-A7ND (E kit)  ... DeviceNet

FR-A7NP (E kit) ... PROFIBUS-DP

FR-A7NL (E kit)  ... L

ON

W

ORKS

E7NECT_2P

*

2

...... EtherCAT

FR-E720-0.2K

FR-E520-0.2K

Estimated service lifespan of the long-life parts

Components

Cooling fan

Main circuit smoothing capacitor

Printed board smoothing capacitor

Estimated lifespan of the FR-E700

10 years
10 years
10 years

Guideline of JEMA

*3

2 to 3 years

5 years
5 years

*3

: Excerpts from “Periodic check of the transistorized inverter” of JEMA (Japan Electrical Manufacturer’s Association)

FR-E500 series

FR-E700 series

Input voltage

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output current

Input voltage

Output frequency

Motor speed

Output current

The FR-A7 E kit can be used for the standard control circuit terminal model only.
For the safety stop function model, use an FR-A7 and a separate dedicated front cover.

128mm

For the customers who need more than 
the standard terminals, the control 
terminal option, RS-485 2 port terminal 
block, is available.
A terminal card is removable and can be 
easily replaced from a standard terminal card.

*

: Use the inverter at the surrounding air temperature 

  of 40˚C or less.

[For the standard control circuit terminal model, order the FR-A7 E kit, which contains an option board FR-A7 and its dedicated front cover.] 

(2) Safety stop function (FR-E700-SC/NF/NC)

Spring clamp terminals are adopted as control circuit terminals.
Spring clamp terminals are highly reliable and can be easily wired. 

The FR-E700-SC series is compliant to the EU Machinery Directive 
without the addition of previously required external devices. 
Operation of an external Emergency Stop device results in a highly 
reliable immediate shutoff of the D700's output to the motor.
This safety stop function conforms to the following standards.

EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd
EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2

Provided by the user (present)

FR-D700

Safety function

is equipped

Emergency stop

Emergency stop

For conventional model...

Two MCs were necessary

For conventional model...

Two MCs were necessary

•High cost
•Maintenance of two MCs 
  was necessary
•Installation space was necessary

•Magnetic contactor (MC)
•Emergency stop wiring

Only one MC is recommended 

instead of two.

Although MC is not required 

for the safety stop function.

Only one MC is recommended 

instead of two.

Although MC is not required 

for the safety stop function.

•Cost reduction
•Maintenance of one MC
•Installation space is reduced

*

: Approved safety relay unit

*

Mitsubishi Electric 

magnetic contactors

•Offer a selection of small frames
•Offer a line-up of safety contactors

•Support with low-level load (auxiliary contact) 
•Support many international regulations as a standard model

Refer to page 85 for the selection. 

Enhanced functions for all sorts of applications

*1

: This option is available for the safety stop function model only. The dedicated front cover is enclosed with the option.

*2

: Manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB. (Only compatible with dedicated EtherCAT communication models)

Energy saving for fans and pumps

Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) 
Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) for application or load characteristics can be selected.

Optimum excitation control (Pr. 60)
With Optimum excitation control to achieve the highest motor efficiency, further energy saving can be achieved.

Refer to page 70

6

7

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel Parameter unit FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension Drawings


background image

Noise filter (ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

Motor

Earth

(Ground)

Noise filter (ferrite core)

*

1

(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

P/+

P/+

PR

PR

High power factor 
converter (FR-HC2)

Power regeneration 
common converter (FR-CV)

Resistor unit (FR-BR) 
Discharging resistor (GZG, GRZG)

Earth

(Ground)

Install a noise filter to reduce the 
electromagnetic noise generated 
from the inverter.
Effective in the range from about 
1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be 
wound four turns at a maximum.

AC power supply

Use within the permissible power supply 
specifications of the inverter.
To ensure safety, use a molded case circuit 
breaker, earth leakage circuit breaker or 
magnetic contactor to switch power ON/OFF.

Enclosure surface

operation panel (FR-PA07)

Connect a connection cable (FR-CB2) to 
the PU connector to use the FR-PA07, 
FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L).

*

2

USB connector

A personal computer and an inverter can 
be connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

Molded case circuit breaker 
(MCCB) or earth leakage current 
breaker (ELB), fuse

The breaker must be selected carefully 
since an in-rush current flows in the 
inverter at power on. 

Magnetic contactor (MC)

Install the magnetic contactor to ensure 
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor 
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will 
cause the inverter life to be shortened.

Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL 
option)

Install reactors to suppress harmonics and 
to improve the power factor.
A reactor (option) is required when 
installing the inverter near a large power 
supply system (500kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do 
not use reactors. Select the reactor 
according to the model. Remove the 
jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1 to 
connect the DC reactor.

Devices connected to the output

Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, 
surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side 
of the inverter. When installing a molded case circuit 
breaker on the output side of the inverter, 
contact each manufacturer for selection of the molded 
case circuit breaker.

Earth (Ground)

To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the 
motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise from 
the power line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire 
the earth  (ground) cable by returning it to the earth 
(ground) terminal of the inverter.

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P1

P/+

N/-

P/+

U

W

Brake unit (FR-BU2)

P/+

PR

V

Power supply harmonics 
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.

*

2

Great braking capability is obtained.
Install this as required.

*

2

The regenerative braking capability of 
the inverter can be exhibited fully.
Install this as required.

Install a noise filter to reduce 
the electromagnetic noise 
generated from the inverter. 
Effective in the range from 
about 1MHz to 10MHz. 
When more wires are passed 
through, a more effective 
result can be obtained. A 
wire should be wound four 
turns or more.

Noise filter
(capacitor)

*

1

 

(FR-BIF)

Reduces 
radio noise.

Lineup

Connectivity

*1

: Filterpack (FR-BFP2), which contains DC reactor and noise filter in one package, is also available.

*2

: The converter is used for the standard control circuit terminal model or the safety stop function model.

DC reactor (FR-HEL)

*

1

AC reactor (FR-HAL)

:Available models

:Not available

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)

Braking capability can be improved. 
(0.4K or higher)
Always install a thermal relay when 
using a brake resistor whose 
capacity is 11K or higher.

Parameter unit

(FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L))

S1

S2

PC

Approved safety 
relay module

Required for compliance 
with safety standard.
The module can be used 
for the safety stop function 
model, FL remote 
communication model, 
and CC-Link 
communication model.

Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking),

and the Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking).

It is also certified as compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).

The single-phase 100V power input model is not compliant with the EMC Directive.

The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction of 

the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic 

Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.

FR-E720    -0.1K

Symbol

1
2
4

Voltage

100V class
200V class
400V class

Symbol

None

SC

NF

NC

Control circuit terminal

specification

Standard control circuit

terminal model (screw type)

Safety stop function model

FL remote communication model

CC-Link communication model

Symbol

0.1K

to

15K

Inverter Capacity

Represents the

inverter capacity

"kW".

Symbol

None

S

W

Number of Power Phases

Three-phase input

Single-phase input
Single-phase input

(double voltage output)

Symbol

None
-NE

*

2

-TM

*

3

Function

Standard type

Ethernet communication

*

1

Dedicated EtherCAT

communication model

Inverter

type

Voltage class

Inverter model

Safety stop

function

0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K

FR-E720-[ ][ ]
FR-E740-[ ][ ]
FR-E720S-[ ][ ]

*

4

FR-E710W-[ ][ ]

*

4

FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC
FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC
FR-E720S-[ ][ ]SC

*

4

FR-E720-[ ][ ]-NE

*

2

FR-E740-[ ][ ]-NE

*

2

FR-E720-[ ][ ]NF
FR-E720-[ ][ ]NC
FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC-TM

*

3

FR-E740-[ ][ ]NF
FR-E740-[ ][ ]NC
FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC-TM

*

3

Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class
Single-phase 200V class
Single-phase 100V class
Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class
Single-phase 200V class
Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class

Three-phase 200V class

Three-phase 400V class

NO

YES

NO

YES























































*1

: CC-Link IE Field Network Basic supported (refer to page 6). 

*2

: Standard control circuit terminal model only.

*3

: Safety stop function model only. By installing the EtherCAT communication option 

 

(E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT communication is possible.

*4

: The output of the single-phase 200V and single-phase 100V input models is three-phase 200V.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

Safety stop 
function 
model

Communication 
model

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel Parameter unit FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension Drawings

9

8


background image

Noise filter (ferrite core)
(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

Motor

Earth

(Ground)

Noise filter (ferrite core)

*

1

(FR-BSF01, FR-BLF)

P/+

P/+

PR

PR

High power factor 
converter (FR-HC2)

Power regeneration 
common converter (FR-CV)

Resistor unit (FR-BR) 
Discharging resistor (GZG, GRZG)

Earth

(Ground)

Install a noise filter to reduce the 
electromagnetic noise generated 
from the inverter.
Effective in the range from about 
1MHz to 10MHz. A wire should be 
wound four turns at a maximum.

AC power supply

Use within the permissible power supply 
specifications of the inverter.
To ensure safety, use a molded case circuit 
breaker, earth leakage circuit breaker or 
magnetic contactor to switch power ON/OFF.

Enclosure surface

operation panel (FR-PA07)

Connect a connection cable (FR-CB2) to 
the PU connector to use the FR-PA07, 
FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L).

*

2

USB connector

A personal computer and an inverter can 
be connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

Molded case circuit breaker 
(MCCB) or earth leakage current 
breaker (ELB), fuse

The breaker must be selected carefully 
since an in-rush current flows in the 
inverter at power on. 

Magnetic contactor (MC)

Install the magnetic contactor to ensure 
safety. Do not use this magnetic contactor 
to start and stop the inverter. Doing so will 
cause the inverter life to be shortened.

Reactor (FR-HAL, FR-HEL 
option)

Install reactors to suppress harmonics and 
to improve the power factor.
A reactor (option) is required when 
installing the inverter near a large power 
supply system (500kVA or more).
The inverter may be damaged if you do 
not use reactors. Select the reactor 
according to the model. Remove the 
jumpers across terminals P/+ - P1 to 
connect the DC reactor.

Devices connected to the output

Do not install a power factor correction capacitor, 
surge suppressor or radio noise filter on the output side 
of the inverter. When installing a molded case circuit 
breaker on the output side of the inverter, 
contact each manufacturer for selection of the molded 
case circuit breaker.

Earth (Ground)

To prevent an electric shock, always earth (ground) the 
motor and inverter. For reduction of induction noise from 
the power line of the inverter, it is recommended to wire 
the earth  (ground) cable by returning it to the earth 
(ground) terminal of the inverter.

R/L1 S/L2 T/L3

P1

P/+

N/-

P/+

U

W

Brake unit (FR-BU2)

P/+

PR

V

Power supply harmonics 
can be greatly suppressed.
Install this as required.

*

2

Great braking capability is obtained.
Install this as required.

*

2

The regenerative braking capability of 
the inverter can be exhibited fully.
Install this as required.

Install a noise filter to reduce 
the electromagnetic noise 
generated from the inverter. 
Effective in the range from 
about 1MHz to 10MHz. 
When more wires are passed 
through, a more effective 
result can be obtained. A 
wire should be wound four 
turns or more.

Noise filter
(capacitor)

*

1

 

(FR-BIF)

Reduces 
radio noise.

Lineup

Connectivity

*1

: Filterpack (FR-BFP2), which contains DC reactor and noise filter in one package, is also available.

*2

: The converter is used for the standard control circuit terminal model or the safety stop function model.

DC reactor (FR-HEL)

*

1

AC reactor (FR-HAL)

:Available models

:Not available

Brake resistor
(FR-ABR, MRS, MYS)

Braking capability can be improved. 
(0.4K or higher)
Always install a thermal relay when 
using a brake resistor whose 
capacity is 11K or higher.

Parameter unit

(FR-PU07/FR-PU07BB(-L))

S1

S2

PC

Approved safety 
relay module

Required for compliance 
with safety standard.
The module can be used 
for the safety stop function 
model, FL remote 
communication model, 
and CC-Link 
communication model.

Complies with UL, cUL, and EC Directives (CE marking),

and the Radio Waves Act (South Korea) (KC marking).

It is also certified as compliant with the Eurasian Conformity (EAC).

The single-phase 100V power input model is not compliant with the EMC Directive.

The inverters are compliant with the EU RoHS Directive (Restriction of 

the Use of Certain Hazardous Substances in Electrical and Electronic 

Equipment), friendly to people and to the environment.

FR-E720    -0.1K

Symbol

1
2
4

Voltage

100V class
200V class
400V class

Symbol

None

SC

NF

NC

Control circuit terminal

specification

Standard control circuit

terminal model (screw type)

Safety stop function model

FL remote communication model

CC-Link communication model

Symbol

0.1K

to

15K

Inverter Capacity

Represents the

inverter capacity

"kW".

Symbol

None

S

W

Number of Power Phases

Three-phase input

Single-phase input
Single-phase input

(double voltage output)

Symbol

None
-NE

*

2

-TM

*

3

Function

Standard type

Ethernet communication

*

1

Dedicated EtherCAT

communication model

Inverter

type

Voltage class

Inverter model

Safety stop

function

0.1K 0.2K 0.4K 0.75K 1.5K 2.2K 3.7K 5.5K 7.5K 11K 15K

FR-E720-[ ][ ]
FR-E740-[ ][ ]
FR-E720S-[ ][ ]

*

4

FR-E710W-[ ][ ]

*

4

FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC
FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC
FR-E720S-[ ][ ]SC

*

4

FR-E720-[ ][ ]-NE

*

2

FR-E740-[ ][ ]-NE

*

2

FR-E720-[ ][ ]NF
FR-E720-[ ][ ]NC
FR-E720-[ ][ ]SC-TM

*

3

FR-E740-[ ][ ]NF
FR-E740-[ ][ ]NC
FR-E740-[ ][ ]SC-TM

*

3

Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class
Single-phase 200V class
Single-phase 100V class
Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class
Single-phase 200V class
Three-phase 200V class
Three-phase 400V class

Three-phase 200V class

Three-phase 400V class

NO

YES

NO

YES























































*1

: CC-Link IE Field Network Basic supported (refer to page 6). 

*2

: Standard control circuit terminal model only.

*3

: Safety stop function model only. By installing the EtherCAT communication option 

 

(E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT communication is possible.

*4

: The output of the single-phase 200V and single-phase 100V input models is three-phase 200V.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

Safety stop 
function 
model

Communication 
model

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel Parameter unit FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension Drawings

9

8


background image

10

Standard specifications

Three-phase 200V power supply

Three-phase 400V power supply



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V for three-phase 200V class and 440V for three-phase 400V class.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 

 that of the power supply.



The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A
brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. (Option brake resistor cannot be used for 0.1K and 0.2K.)



The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).



Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation in the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40°C, the rated
output current is the value in parenthesis.



Connect DC power supply to terminal P/+ and N/-. Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.

When energy is regenerated from the motor, the voltage between terminals P/+ and N/- may rise to 415V of more for the 200V class, or 810V or more for
the 400V class. Use a DC power supply resistant to the regenerative voltage/energy.
If using the power supply which cannot withstand voltage/energy during regeneration, insert diodes in series for reverse current prevention.

Although the FR-E700 series has the built-in inrush current limit circuit, select the DC power supply considering the inrush current at power-ON as the
inrush current four times of the rated inverter flows at power-ON.

Since the power supply capacity depends on the output impedance of the power, select the power supply capacity which has enough allowance according
to the AC power supply system capacity.



The safety stop function model is indicated with SC.

 "NF" indicates the FL remote communication function model.
 "NC" indicates the CC-Link communication model.
 "-NE" indicates the Ethernet communication function model.
 "-TM" indicates the dedicated EtherCAT communication model. (Only for inverters that support the safety stop function.)

Rating

Model FR-E720-K

(SC)



(NF)



(NC)



(-NE)



(-TM)



0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Applicable motor capacity (kW)



0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Ou

tp

u

t

Rated capacity (kVA)



0.3

0.6

1.2

2.0

3.2

4.4

7.0

9.5

13.1

18.7

23.9

Rated current (A)



0.8

(0.8)

1.5

(1.4)

3

(2.5)

5

(4.1)

8

(7)

11

(10)

17.5

(16.5)

24

(23)

33

(31)

47

(44)

60

(57)

Overload current rating



150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)

Rated voltage



Three-phase 200 to 240V

Regenerative braking torque



150%

100%

50%

20%

P

o

wer supply

Rated input
AC (DC) voltage/frequency

Three-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz (283 to 339VDC



)

Permissible AC (DC) voltage 
fluctuation

170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz (240 to 373VDC



)

Permissible frequency fluctuation

±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)



0.4

0.8

1.5

2.5

4.5

5.5

9

12

17

20

28

Protective structure (JEM1030)

Enclosed type (IP20)

Open type (IP00) for the FL remote communication model, CC-Link communication model, and 

the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

Cooling system

Natural

Forced air

Approximate mass (kg)

0.5

0.5

0.7

1.0

1.4

1.4

1.7

4.3

4.3

6.5

6.5

Model FR-E740-K

(SC)



(NF)



(NC)



(-NE)



(-TM)



0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Applicable motor capacity (kW)



0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Ou

tp

u

t

Rated capacity (kVA)



1.2

2.0

3.0

4.6

7.2

9.1

13.0

17.5

23.0

Rated current (A)



1.6

(1.4)

2.6

(2.2)

4.0

(3.8)

6.0

(5.4)

9.5

(8.7)

12

17

23

30

Overload current rating



150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)

Rated voltage



Three-phase 380 to 480V

Regenerative braking torque



100%

50%

20%

Power

 supp

ly

Rated input voltage/frequency

Three-phase 380 to 480V 50Hz/60Hz (537 to 679VDC



)

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

325 to 528V 50Hz/60Hz (457 to 740VDC



)

Permissible frequency fluctuation

±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)



1.5

2.5

4.5

5.5

9.5

12

17

20

28

Protective structure (JEM1030)

Enclosed type (IP20)

Open type (IP00) for the FL remote communication model, CC-Link communication model, and 

the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

Cooling system

Natural

Forced air

Approximate mass (kg)

1.4

1.4

1.9

1.9

1.9

3.2

3.2

6.0

6.0

2


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

11

Single-phase 200V power supply

Single-phase 100V power supply



The applicable motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.



The rated output capacity indicated assumes that the output voltage is 230V.



The % value of the overload current rating indicated is the ratio of the overload current to the inverter's rated output current. For repeated duty, allow time for
the inverter and motor to return to or below the temperatures under 100% load. If the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure function (Pr. 57) or
power failure stop function (Pr. 261) is set and power supply voltage is low while load becomes bigger, the bus voltage decreases to power failure detection
level and load of 100% or more may not be available.



The maximum output voltage does not exceed the power supply voltage. The maximum output voltage can be changed within the setting range. However,
the pulse voltage value of the inverter output side voltage remains unchanged at about 

 that of the power supply.



The braking torque indicated is a short-duration average torque (which varies with motor loss) when the motor alone is decelerated from 60Hz in the shortest
time and is not a continuous regenerative torque. When the motor is decelerated from the frequency higher than the base frequency, the average
deceleration torque will reduce. Since the inverter does not contain a brake resistor, use the optional brake resistor when regenerative energy is large. A
brake unit (FR-BU2) may also be used. (Option brake resistor cannot be used for 0.1K and 0.2K.)



The power supply capacity varies with the value of the power supply side inverter impedance (including those of the input reactor and cables).



Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform low acoustic noise operation with the surrounding air temperature exceeding 40°C, the
rated output current is the value in parenthesis.



For single-phase 100V power input model, the maximum output voltage is twice the amount of the power supply voltage and cannot be exceeded.



In a single-phase 100V power input model, the output voltage may fall down when the load is heavy, and larger output current may flow compared to a
threephase input model. Use the motor with less load so that the output current is within the rated motor current range.

 The safety stop function model is indicated with SC.
 "-NE" indicates the Ethernet communication function model.

Model FR-E720S-K

(SC)



(-NE)



0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

Applicable motor capacity (kW)



0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

Ou

tp

u

t

Rated capacity (kVA)



0.3

0.6

1.2

2.0

3.2

4.4

Rated current (A)



0.8

(0.8)

1.5

(1.4)

3.0

(2.5)

5.0

(4.1)

8.0

(7.0)

11.0

(10.0)

Overload current rating



150% 60s, 200% 3s (inverse-time characteristics)

Rated voltage



Three-phase 200 to 240V

Regenerative braking torque



150%

100%

50%

20%

P

o

wer s

u

pply

Rated input AC voltage/frequency

Single-phase 200 to 240V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

170 to 264V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

Within ±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)



0.5

0.9

1.5

2.5

4.0

5.2

Protective structure (JEM1030)

Enclosed type (IP20)

Cooling system

Natural

Forced air

Approximate mass (kg)

0.6

0.6

0.9

1.4

1.5

2.0

Model FR-E710W-K

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

Applicable motor capacity (kW)



0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

Ou

tp

u

t

Rated capacity (kVA)



0.3

0.6

1.2

2.0

Rated current (A)



0.8

(0.8)

1.5

(1.4)

3.0

(2.5)

5.0

(4.1)

Overload current rating



150% 60s, 200% 3s 

(inverse-time characteristics)

Rated voltage

Three-phase 200 to 230V





Regenerative braking torque



150%

100%

P

o

wer s

upply

Rated input AC voltage/frequency

Single-phase 100 to 115V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible AC voltage fluctuation

90 to 132V 50Hz/60Hz

Permissible frequency fluctuation

Within ±5%

Power supply capacity (kVA)



0.5

0.9

1.5

2.5

Protective structure (JEM1030)

Enclosed type (IP20)

Cooling system

Natural

Approximate mass (kg)

0.6

0.7

0.9

1.5

2


background image

12

Common specifications

Co

n

tr

o

l sp

eci

fi

cat

io

n

s

Control method

Soft-PWM control/high carrier frequency PWM control (V/F control, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, 

General-purpose magnetic flux vector control, Optimum excitation control are available)

Output frequency range

0.2 to 400Hz

Frequency setting 

resolution

Analog input



0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 10V/10bit)

0.12Hz/60Hz (terminal2, 4: 0 to 5V/9bit)

0.06Hz/60Hz (terminal4: 0 to 20mA/10bit)

Digital input

0.01Hz

Frequency 

accuracy

Analog input



Within 

0.5% of the max. output frequency (25°C 10°C)

Digital input

Within 0.01% of the set output frequency

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Base frequency can be set from 0 to 400Hz, Constant-torque/variable torque pattern can be selected

Starting torque

200% or more (at 0.5Hz)...when Advanced magnetic flux vector control is set (3.7K or lower)

Torque boost

Manual torque boost

Acceleration/deceleration time setting

0.01 to 360s, 0.1 to 3600s (acceleration and deceleration can be set individually), linear or S-pattern acceleration/

deceleration modes are available.

DC injection brake

Operation frequency (0 to 120Hz), operation time (0 to 10s), operation voltage (0 to 30%) can be changed.

Stall prevention operation level

Operation current level can be set (0 to 200% adjustable), whether to use the function or not can be selected

O

p

er

ati

o

n

 sp

ec

if

ic

ati

o

n

s

Frequency setting 

signal

Analog input



Two terminals

Terminal 2: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V can be selected

Terminal 4: 0 to 10V, 0 to 5V, 4 to 20mA can be selected

Digital input

Input from the operation panel or parameter unit. (Instead of the input from the parameter unit, input via the FL 

remote network is available for the FL remote communication model, and input via the CC-Link network is 

available for the CC-Link communication model.) Frequency setting increment is selectable.

4 digit BCD or 16bit binary data (when the option FR-A7AX E kit is used)

Start signal

Forward and reverse rotation or start signal automatic self-holding input

 (3-wire input) can be selected.

Input signal



(Standard control circuit terminal 

model: Seven terminals

Safety stop function model: Six 

terminals)

The following signals can be assigned to Pr. 178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection): multi-speed selection, 

remote setting, stop-on contact selection, second function selection, terminal 4 input selection

, JOG operation 

selection

, PID control valid terminal, brake opening completion signal, external thermal input, PU-External 

operation switchover

, V/F switchover, output stop, start self-holding selection, forward rotation, reverse 

rotation command

, inverter reset, PU-NET operation switchover, External-NET operation 

switchover

, command source switchover, inverter operation enable signal, and PU operation external 

interlock



Operational functions

Maximum/minimum frequency setting, frequency jump operation, external thermal relay input selection



automatic restart after instantaneous power failure operation, forward/reverse rotation prevention, remote setting, 

brake sequence

, second function, multi-speed operation, stop-on contact control, droop control, regeneration 

avoidance, slip compensation, operation mode selection, offline auto tuning function, PID control

, computer 

link operation (RS-485)



Safety stop function



Safety shutoff signal can be input from terminals S1 and S2. (compliant with EN ISO 13849-1 Category 3 / PLd

EN62061 / IEC61508 SIL2)

Output signal



Open collector output (Two terminals)

Relay output (One terminal)

The following signals can be assigned to Pr.190 to Pr.192 (output terminal function selection): inverter operation, up-

to-frequency, overload alarm, output frequency detection, regenerative brake prealarm, electronic thermal relay 

function prealarm, inverter operation ready, output current detection, zero current detection, PID lower limit, PID 

upper limit, PID forward/reverse rotation output, brake opening request, fan alarm

, heatsink overheat pre-

alarm, deceleration at an instantaneous power failure, PID control activated, safety monitor output

, safety 

monitor output2

, 24V external power supply operation, during retry, life alarm, current average value monitor, 

remote output, alarm output, fault output, fault output 3, and maintenance timer alarm

Operating status

For meter

Pulse train output

(Max. 2.4kHz: one terminal)



The following signals can be assigned to Pr.54 FM terminal function selection: output frequency, motor current 

(steady), output voltage, frequency setting, motor torque, converter output voltage, regenerative brake duty, 

electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output voltage peak value, 

reference voltage output, motor load factor, PID set point, PID measured value, output power

Pulse train output (1440 pulses/s/full scale)

Indi

c

ati

o

n Operation panel

Parameter unit 

(FR-PU07)



Operating status

The following operating status can be displayed: output frequency, motor current (steady), output voltage, 

frequency setting, cumulative energization time, actual operation time, motor torque, converter output voltage, 

regenerative brake duty, electronic thermal relay function load factor, output current peak value, converter output 

voltage peak value, motor load factor, PID set point

, PID measured value, PID deviation, inverter I/O 

terminal monitor, I/O terminal option monitor

, output power, cumulative power, motor thermal load factor, 

and inverter thermal load factor.

Fault record

Fault record is displayed when a fault occurs. Past 8 fault records (output voltage/current/frequency/cumulative 

energization time right before the fault occurs) are stored

Interactive 

guidance



Function (help) for operation guide



Protective/warning 

function

Protective 

functions

Overcurrent during acceleration, overcurrent during constant speed, overcurrent during deceleration, overvoltage 

during acceleration, overvoltage during constant speed, overvoltage during deceleration, inverter protection 

thermal operation, motor protection thermal operation, heatsink overheat, input phase failure

, stall prevention 

stop, output side earth (ground) fault overcurrent at start

, output short circuit, output phase failure, external 

thermal relay operation

, option fault, parameter error, internal board fault, PU disconnection, 

retry count excess

, CPU fault, brake transistor alarm, inrush resistance overheat, communication error, analog 

input error

, USB communication error, brake sequence error 4 to 7, safety circuit fault

Warning 

functions

Fan alarm

, overcurrent stall prevention, overvoltage stall prevention, PU stop, parameter write error, 

regenerative brake prealarm

, electronic thermal relay function prealarm, maintenance output, undervoltage, 

operation panel lock, password locked

, inverter reset, safety stop, 24V external power supply in operation

En

vir

o

n

m

en

t Surrounding air temperature

-10°C to +50°C (non-freezing)



Ambient humidity

90%RH or less (non-condensing)

Storage temperature



-20°C to +65°C

Atmosphere

Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, oil mist, dust and dirt etc.)

Altitude/vibration

Maximum 1000m, 5.9m/s

2

 or less at 10 to 55Hz (directions of X, Y, Z axes)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

13



This function is not available for models of 0.75K or less. (0.4K or less for

single-phase 200V class)



This function is available for the safety stop function model and the CC-

Link communication model.



This function is not available for the standard control circuit terminal

model.



This operation guide is only available with option parameter unit (FR-

PU07).



This protective function is not available in the initial status.



This protective function is available with the three-phase power input

model only.



When using the inverters at the surrounding air temperature of 40°C or

less, the inverters can be installed closely attached (0cm clearance).



Temperatures applicable for a short time, e.g. in transit.



This function is not available for the FL remote communication model.

 This function is not available for the FL remote communication model and

the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

 The output signal of the FL remote communication model, CC-Link

communication model, and Dedicated EtherCAT communication model

have only one open collector output terminal. For the FL remote

communication model, the terminal is used only for the safety monitor

output signal (not selectable).

 This function is available for the safety stop function model (when

equipped with the FR-E7DS), FL remote communication model, CC-Link

communication model, and dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

 This function is not available for the CC-Link communication model.

 For the CC-Link communication model, input signals can be assigned to

the input virtual terminals for CC-Link communication.


background image

14

Outline Dimensions

FR-E720-0.1K(SC) to 0.75K(SC)

FR-E720S-0.1K(SC) to 0.4K(SC)

FR-E710W-0.1K to 0.4K

(Unit: mm)

4

D

D1

4

D2 

D1

5

68

56

5

118

5

128

φ5 hole

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

Inverter Model

D

D1

D2 

FR-E720-0.1K, 0.2K
FR-E720S-0.1K, 0.2K
FR-E710W-0.1K

80.5

10

95.6

FR-E720-0.1KSC, 0.2KSC
FR-E720S-0.1KSC, 0.2KSC

86.5

108.1

FR-E710W-0.2K

110.5

10

125.6

FR-E720-0.4K

112.5

42

127.6

FR-E720-0.4KSC

118.5

140.1

FR-E720-0.75K

132.5

62

147.6

FR-E720-0.75KSC

138.5

160.1

FR-E720S-0.4K
FR-E710W-0.4K

142.5

42

157.6

FR-E720S-0.4KSC

148.5

170.1

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or

the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

When used with the plug-in option


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

15

FR-E720-1.5K(SC), 2.2K(SC)

FR-E720S-0.75K(SC), 1.5K(SC)

FR-E710W-0.75K

FR-E720-3.7K(SC)

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

2-

φ5 hole

96

108

5

118

5

128

5

D

5

D2

*2

5

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

D1

D1

*1

When used with the plug-in option



FR-E710W-0.75K are not provided with the cooling fan.

Inverter Model

D

D1

D2 



FR-E720-1.5K, 2.2K
FR-E720S-0.75K

135.5

60

150.6

FR-E720-1.5KSC, 2.2KSC
FR-E720S-0.75KSC

141.5

163.1

FR-E720S-1.5K

161

176.1

FR-E720S-1.5KSC

167

188.6

FR-E710W-0.75K

155

54

170.1



When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal
model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used
for the safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward,
increasing the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

5

158

170

5

118

5

128

2-

φ5 hole

5

D

D1

 *

5

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

66.5 

66.5

When used with the plug-in option

Inverter Model

D

D1 

FR-E720-3.7K

142.5

157.6

FR-E720-3.7KSC

148.5

170.1

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control

terminal model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety
cover SC is used for the safety stop function model, a terminal
block protrudes forward, increasing the depth by about 2mm
(up to 2.8mm).


background image

16

FR-E720-5.5K(SC) to 15K(SC)

(Unit: mm)

6

W1

W

8

244

8

260

D3

D

D3

D1

*

2-

φ6hole

W2

D2

D2

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

When used with the plug-in option

Inverter 

Model

W

W1

W2

D

D1 

D2

D3

FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K

180

164

180

165

180.1

71.5

10

FR-E720-5.5KSC, 7.5KSC

171

192.6

FR-E720-11K, 15K

220

195

211

190

205.1

84.5

10.5

FR-E720-11KSC, 15KSC

196

217.6

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC

E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing
the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

17

FR-E740-0.4K(SC) to 3.7K(SC)

FR-E720S-2.2K(SC)

FR-E740-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)

(Unit: mm)

(Unit: mm)

5

D

D1

5

128

140

138

6

6

2-

φ5 hole

150

5

D2 

∗2

D1

∗1

∗1

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

Capacity 

plate

When used with the plug-in option



FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K are not provided with the cooling fan.

Inverter Model

D

D1

D2 



FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K

114

39

129.1

FR-E740-0.4KSC, 0.75KSC

120

141.6

FR-E740-1.5K to 3.7K

135

60

150.1

FR-E740-1.5KSC to 3.7KSC

141

162.6

FR-E720S-2.2K

155.5

170.6

FR-E720S-2.2KSC

161.5

183.1



When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model,
or the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the
safety stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing
the depth by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).

2-

φ5 hole

138

6

6

150

5

208

220

10

D

68

10

D1

68

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

When used with the plug-in option

Inverter Model

D

D1 

FR-E740-5.5K, 7.5K

147

162.1

FR-E740-5.5KSC, 7.5KSC

153

174.6

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or

the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).


background image

18

FR-E740-11K(SC), 15K(SC)

(Unit: mm)

6

195

8

8

260

244

FAN

10.5

84.5

84.5

D

2-

φ6 hole

FAN

10.5

D1 *

211

220

Capacity 

plate

Rating 

plate

Rating 

plate

When used with the plug-in option

Inverter Model

D

D1 

FR-E740-11K, 15K

190

205.1

FR-E740-11KSC, 15KSC

196

217.6

 When the FR-A7NC (E kit) is used for the standard control terminal model, or

the FR-A7NC and the FR-A7NC E kit safety cover SC is used for the safety
stop function model, a terminal block protrudes forward, increasing the depth
by about 2mm (up to 2.8mm).


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

19

FL remote communication model

CC-Link communication model

D

W1

W

H1

H

W

W1

H1

H

φC hole

φC hole

(Unit: mm)

 Three-phase 200V class

 Three-phase 400V class

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E720-0.1KNF

68

56

128

118

89.5

5

FR-E720-0.2KNF
FR-E720-0.4KNF

121.5

FR-E720-0.75KNF

141.5

FR-E720-1.5KNF

108

96

144.5

FR-E720-2.2KNF
FR-E720-3.7KNF

170

158

151.5

FR-E720-5.5KNF

180

164

260

244

174

6

FR-E720-7.5KNF

FR-E720-11KNF

220

195

199

FR-E720-15KNF

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E740-0.4KNF

140

128

150

138

123

5

FR-E740-0.75KNF

FR-E740-1.5KNF

144

FR-E740-2.2KNF
FR-E740-3.7KNF
FR-E740-5.5KNF

220

208

156

FR-E740-7.5KNF

FR-E740-11KNF

195

260

244

199

6

FR-E740-15KNF

FR-E720-0.1KNF to 0.75KNF

FR-E720-1.5KNF to 15KNF

FR-E740-0.4KNF to 15KNF

W1

W

H1

H

D

φC

H1

H

W1

W

φC

(Unit: mm)

 Three-phase 200V class

 Three-phase 400V class

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E720-0.1KNC

68

56

128

118

108

5

FR-E720-0.2KNC
FR-E720-0.4KNC

140

FR-E720-0.75KNC

160

FR-E720-1.5KNC

108

96

163

FR-E720-2.2KNC
FR-E720-3.7KNC

170

158

170

FR-E720-5.5KNC

180

164

260

244

192.5

6

FR-E720-7.5KNC

FR-E720-11KNC

220

195

217.5

FR-E720-15KNC

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E740-0.4KNC

140

128

150

138

141.5

5

FR-E740-0.75KNC

FR-E740-1.5KNC

162.5

FR-E740-2.2KNC
FR-E740-3.7KNC
FR-E740-5.5KNC

220

208

174.5

FR-E740-7.5KNC

FR-E740-11KNC

195

260

244

217.5

6

FR-E740-15KNC

FR-E720-0.1KNC to 0.75KNC

FR-E720-1.5KNC to 15KNC

FR-E740-0.4KNC to 15KNC


background image

20

Ethernet communication function model

D

φC

W1

W

H1

H

W1

W

H1

H

φC

(Unit: mm)

 Three-phase 200V class

 Single-phase 200V class

 Three-phase 400V class

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E720-0.1K-NE

68

56

128

118

108

5

FR-E720-0.2K-NE
FR-E720-0.4K-NE

140

FR-E720-0.75K-NE

160

FR-E720-1.5K-NE

108

96

163

FR-E720-2.2K-NE
FR-E720-3.7K-NE

170

158

170

FR-E720-5.5K-NE

180

164

260

244

192.5

6

FR-E720-7.5K-NE

FR-E720-11K-NE

220

195

217.5

FR-E720-15K-NE

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E720S-0.1K-NE

68

56

128

118

108

5

FR-E720S-0.2K-NE
FR-E720S-0.4K-NE

170

FR-E720S-0.75K-NE

108

96

163

FR-E720S-1.5K-NE

188.5

FR-E720S-2.2K-NE

140

128

150

138

183

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E740-0.4K-NE

140

128

150

138

141.5

5

FR-E740-0.75K-NE

FR-E740-1.5K-NE

162.5

FR-E740-2.2K-NE
FR-E740-3.7K-NE
FR-E740-5.5K-NE

220

208

174.5

FR-E740-7.5K-NE

FR-E740-11K-NE

195

260

244

217.5

6

FR-E740-15K-NE

FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75K-NE

FR-E720S-0.1K to 0.4K-NE

FR-E720-1.5K to 15K-NE

FR-E740-0.4K to 15K-NE

FR-E720S-0.75K to 2.2K-NE


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

Standard

Specifications

21

Dedicated EtherCAT communication model
By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

φC

H1

H

W1

W

φC

W1

W

H1

H

D

(Unit: mm)

 Three-phase 200V class

 Three-phase 400V class

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E720-0.1KSC-TM

68

56

128

118

108

5

FR-E720-0.2KSC-TM
FR-E720-0.4KSC-TM

140

FR-E720-0.75KSC-TM

160

FR-E720-1.5KSC-TM

108

96

163

FR-E720-2.2KSC-TM
FR-E720-3.7KSC-TM

170

158

170

FR-E720-5.5KSC-TM

180

164

260

244

192.5

6

FR-E720-7.5KSC-TM

FR-E720-11KSC-TM

220

195

217.5

FR-E720-15KSC-TM

Inverter Model

W

W1

H

H1

D

C

FR-E740-0.4KSC-TM

140

128

150

138

141.5

5

FR-E740-0.75KSC-TM
FR-E740-1.5KSC-TM

162.5

FR-E740-2.2KSC-TM
FR-E740-3.7KSC-TM
FR-E740-5.5KSC-TM

220

208

174.5

FR-E740-7.5KSC-TM

FR-E740-11KSC-TM

195

260

244

217.5

6

FR-E740-15KSC-TM

FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75KSC-TM

FR-E720-1.5K to 15KSC-TM

FR-E740-0.4K to 15KSC-TM


background image

22

Parameter unit (option) (FR-PU07)

<

Outline drawing>

<

Panel cut dimension drawing

>

Parameter unit with battery pack (option) (FR-PU07BB)

Enclosure surface operation panel (option) (FR-PA07)

<

Outline drawing>

<

Panel cut dimension drawing>

67

51

40

56.8

57.8

26.5

4-R1

26.5

40

4-φ4 hole

(

Effective depth of the 

installation screw hole 5.0)

M3 screw *2

Air-bleeding 

hole 

80.3

(14.2)

2.5

50

(11.45)

25.05

135

83

*1

*1

*1

*1



When installing the FR-PU07 on the enclosure, etc., remove
screws or fix the screws to the FR-PU07 with M3 nuts.



Select the installation screw whose length will not exceed the
effective depth of the installation screw hole.

(Unit: mm)

<Outline drawing>

8.2

46.7

44.7

46.7

135

83

18

6

(Unit: mm)

68

59

22

22

2-M3 screw

(Unit: mm)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

23

Terminal Connection Diagram

(1) Standard control circuit terminal model

l

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

Earth 

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*8  Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*7  A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K 

and 0.2K.

Forward 

rotation start
Reverse 

rotation start

Middle 

speed

High 

speed

Low 

speed

Output 

stop

Reset

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)

Contact input common

24VDC power supply 

(Common for external power supply transistor)

STR

STF

RH

RM

RL

MRS

SD

PC

Relay output

Running

Frequency detection

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Sink/source common

FU

RUN

SE

A

B

C

FM

SD

Indicator

(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

Moving-coil type

1mA full-scale

Calibration resistor

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

2 0 to 5VDC

10(+5V)

2

3

1

Frequency 

setting 

potentiometer

1/2W1kΩ

5(Analog common)

*4

Connector for 

plug-in option connection

Option connector

*3 Terminal input specifications 

can be changed by analog 

input specifications 

switchover (Pr. 73).

*2 When using terminals 

PC-SD as a 24VDC 

power supply, take care 

not to short across 

terminals PC-SD.

PU

connector

USB

connector

*9  It is not necessary when calibrating the 

indicator from the operation panel.

*1.  DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1 and P/+.

Not available for single-phase 100V power 

input model.

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Sink logic

Jumper

*1

*8

*7

*6

*2

*3

*9

Terminal functions vary 

with the input terminal 

assignment (Pr. 178 to 
Pr. 184
)

Multi-speed selection

Terminal functions vary with 

the output terminal assignment 

(Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)

Terminal functions vary 

by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal 
function selection

SINK

SOURCE

I

V

*5

(0 to 10VDC)

Voltage/current 

input switch

Main circuit

Control circuit

Standard control terminal block

R

RES

Relay output

(Fault output)

Brake unit

(Option)

Single-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1
S/L2

Single-phase power input

*6  Terminal P1 is not available for 

single-phase 100V power input model.

Terminal 4 input

(Current input)

(+)

(-)

4 4 to 20mADC

*5

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

*5 Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 

input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the 

voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 

voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to 

select current input (4 to 20mA).

To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" 

in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) 

to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.

*4 It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ 

when the frequency setting signal 

is changed frequently. 

*10  Operation and parameter setting can be 

done  from the parameter unit (FR-PU07) 

and the enclosure surface operation panel 

(FR-PA07).

(Use the option cable (FR-CB2     ).)

RS-485 communication can be utilized from 

a personal computer and other devices.

*11  A personal computer and an inverter can be 

connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

You can perform parameter setting and 

monitoring with the FR Configurator (FR-

SW3-SETUP-W   ).

*10

*11


background image

24

(2) Safety stop function model

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

Earth 

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*7  Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*6  A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K 

and 0.2K.

Forward 

rotation start
Reverse 

rotation start

Middle 

speed

High 

speed

Low 

speed

Reset

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)

Contact input common

STR

STF

RH

RM

RL

RES

Relay output

Running

Frequency detection

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Sink/source common

FU

RUN

SE

A

B

C

FM

SD

Indicator

(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

Moving-coil type

1mA full-scale

Calibration resistor

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

2 0 to 5VDC

10(+5V)

2

3

1

Frequency 

setting 

potentiometer

1/2W1kΩ

5(Analog common)

*4

Connector for 

plug-in option connection

Option connector

*3 Terminal input specifications 

can be changed by analog 

input specifications 

switchover (Pr. 73).

*2  When using terminals 

PC-SD as a 24VDC 

power supply, take care 

not to short across 

terminals PC-SD.

PU

connector

USB

connector

*8  It is not necessary when calibrating the 

indicator from the operation panel.

*1.  DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1 and P/+.

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Sink logic

Jumper

*1

*7

*6

*3

*8

Terminal functions vary 

with the input terminal 

assignment (Pr. 178 to 
Pr. 182 and Pr. 184
)

Multi-speed selection

Terminal functions vary with 

the output terminal assignment 

(Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)

Terminal functions vary 

by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal 
function selection

SINK

SOURCE

V

I

*5

(0 to 10VDC)

Voltage/current 

input switch

Main circuit

Control circuit

Safety stop function model

R

SD

Relay output

(Fault output)

Brake unit

(Option)

Single-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1
S/L2

Single-phase power input

24VDC power supply 

(Common for external power supply transistor)

Safety stop input common terminal

PC *2

S1
S2

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting wire

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

Terminal 4 input

(Current input)

(+)

(-)

4 4 to 20mADC

*5

0 to 5VDC

0 to 10VDC

*5  Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 

input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the 

voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 

voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to 

select current input (4 to 20mA).

To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" 

in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) 

to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.

*4  It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ 

when the frequency setting signal 

is changed frequently. 

*9  Operation and parameter setting can be 

done  from the parameter unit (FR-PU07) 

and the enclosure surface operation panel 

(FR-PA07).

(Use the option cable (FR-CB2     ).)

RS-485 communication can be utilized from 

a personal computer and other devices.

*10  A personal computer and an inverter can be 

connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

*10

*9


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

25

(3) FL remote communication model (NF)

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

Earth

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*3  Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*2  A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K 

and 0.2K.

24V external power supply

SD

+24

Open collector output Y0

(Safety monitor output 2)

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Y0

SE

FL remote

communication

connector

*1.  DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1-P/+.

Jumper

*1

*3

*2

Brake unit

(Option)

Main circuit

Control circuit

R

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Sink logic

Node address setting

0

9 8 7 6

5

4

3

2

1

0

9 8 7 6

5

4

3

2

1

X1 X10

D1 D2

D3 D4

LED (operation status display)
D1: Communication setting status LED (CHG)

D2: Device status LED (DEV)

D3: Reception/transmission LED (TX/RX)

D4: Remote status LED (RMT)

Safety stop signal

S1
S2

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting

wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

24V power supply

Common terminal

PC


background image

26

(4) CC-Link communication model (NC)

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

Earth

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase

AC power

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*3  Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*2  A brake transistor is not built-in to the 0.1K 

and 0.2K.

24V external power supply

SD

+24

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Sink/source common

Y0

SE

CC-Link

communication

connector

(2-port type)

*1.  DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1 and P/+.

Jumper

*1

*3

*2

Use Pr. 190 RX2 (Y0 terminal) 
function selection
 to change the 

function assigned to the terminal.

Brake unit

(Option)

R

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Sink logic

Safety stop signal

S1
S2

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

24V power supply

Shorting

wire

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

Safety stop input common

LED (operation status indicator)

LEDs turn ON/OFF to indicate

the operation status.

SD L.RUN

RD L.ERR

RUN

PC

Open collector output Y0

(While the inverter is running)

Common terminal

24V

Main circuit

Control circuit

USB

connector

*4

*4  A personal computer and an inverter can be 

connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable.

You can perform parameter setting and 

monitoring with the FR Configurator (FR-

SW3-SETUP-W   ).


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

27

(5) Ethernet communication function model (-NE)

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

The output of the single-phase power input model is three-phase 200V.

Earth 

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*7   Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*6   A brake transistor is not built-in to the 

0.1K and 0.2K.

Forward 

rotation start
Reverse 

rotation start

Middle 

speed

High 

speed

Low 

speed

Output 

stop

Reset

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)

Contact input common

24VDC power supply 

(Common for external power supply transistor)

STR

STF

RH

RM

RL

MRS

SD

PC

Relay output

Running

Frequency detection

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Sink/source common

FU

RUN

SE

A

B

C

FM

SD

Indicator

(Frequency meter, etc.)

+

-

Moving-coil type

1mA full-scale

Calibration resistor

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

2 0 to 5VDC

10(+5V)

2

3

1

4 4 to 20mADC

Frequency 

setting 

potentiometer

1/2W1kΩ

(+)

(-)

5(Analog common)

*4

*3  Terminal input specifications 

can be changed by analog 

input specifications 

switchover (Pr. 73).

*2   When using terminals PC 

and SD as a 24VDC 

power supply, take care 

not to short across 

terminals PC and SD.

PU

connector

USB

connector

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Sink logic

Jumper

*1

*7

*6

*2

*3

*5

*8

Terminal functions vary 

with the input terminal 

assignment (Pr. 178 to 
Pr. 184
)

Multi-speed selection

Terminal functions vary with 

the output terminal assignment 

(Pr. 190 and Pr. 191)

Terminal functions vary 

by Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal 
function selection

SINK

SOURCE

I

V

*5

0 to 5VDC

(0 to 10VDC)

0 to 10VDC

Voltage/current 

input switch

Main circuit

Control circuit

Standard control terminal block

R

RES

Relay output

(Fault output)

Brake unit

(Option)

Single-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1
S/L2

Single-phase power input

*5  Terminal input specifications can be changed by analog 

input specifications switchover (Pr. 267). Set the 

voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 

voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial value) to 

select current input (4 to 20mA). 

To use terminal 4 (initial setting is current input), set "4" 

in any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal function selection) 

to assign the function, and turn ON AU signal.

*1.   DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1-P/+.

*9

*10

*9   Operation and parameter setting can be 

done from the parameter unit (FR-PU07) 

and the enclosure surface operation panel 

(FR-PA07). 

(Use the option cable (FR-CB2     ).) 

RS-485 communication can be utilized from 

a personal computer and other devices.

*8   It is not necessary when calibrating the 

indicator from the operation panel.

Ethernet 

connector

Terminal 4 input

(Current input)

*4  It is recommended to use 2W1kΩ 

when the frequency setting signal 

is changed frequently. 

*10   A personal computer and an inverter can be 

connected with a USB (Ver1.1) cable. 

You can perform parameter setting and 

monitoring with the FR Configurator2 

(SW1DND-FRC2-   ).


background image

28

(6) Dedicated EtherCAT communication model (-TM)

By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

Note

To prevent a malfunction caused by noise, separate the signal cables more than 10cm from the power cables. Also
separate the main circuit wire of the input side and the output side.

After wiring, wire offcuts must not be left in the inverter.
Wire offcuts can cause an alarm, failure or malfunction. Always keep the inverter clean. When drilling mounting holes
in an enclosure etc., take care not to allow chips and other foreign matter to enter the inverter.

Earth 

(Ground)

Motor

IM

Earth (Ground)

Three-phase 

AC power 

supply

MCCB

MC

R/L1

P1

P/+

PR N/-

S/L2
T/L3

U

V

W

Earth

(Ground)

*3   Brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS, MYS type)

Install a thermal relay to prevent an 

overheat and burnout of the brake resistor.

(The brake resistor cannot be connected 

to the 0.1K and 0.2K.)

*2   A brake transistor is not built-in to the 

0.1K and 0.2K.

Control circuit terminal

Main circuit terminal

Jumper

*1

*3

*2

Main circuit

Control circuit

R

Brake unit

(Option)

24V external power supply

SD

+24

Y0

SE

Safety stop signal

S1
S2

PC

Safety stop input (Channel 1)

Shorting

wire

Safety stop input common

Safety stop input (Channel 2)

24V power supply

Common terminal

24V

Open collector output Y0

(Inverter running)

Open collector output

Open collector output common

Use Pr.190 Y0 terminal function 
selection
 to change the function 

assigned to the terminal.

EtherCAT communication 

option connector

*1.   DC reactor (FR-HEL)

When connecting a DC reactor, remove the 

jumper across P1 and P/+.

USB

connector


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

29

Terminal Specifications

(1) Standard control circuit terminal model, safety stop function model (SC)

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

M

a

in

 c

ir

c

u

it

R/L1, S/L2, 

T/L3 

AC power input

Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power 
factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).

 When using single-phase power input, terminals are R/L1 and S/L2.

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

P/+, PR

Brake resistor 

connection

Connect a brake transistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+-PR.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K)

P/+, N/-

Brake unit connection

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or high power 
factor converter (FR-HC2).

DC power input

Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.

P/+, P1 

DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals P/+-P1 and connect a DC reactor. Single-phase 100V power 
input model is not compatible with DC reactor.

 Terminal P1 is not available for single-phase 100V power input model.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

C

ont

ro

l c

ir

c

ui

t/

in

put

 s

ign

a

l

C

ont

a

c

t i

npu

t

STF

Forward rotation start

Turn on the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it off to stop. When the STF and STR signals 

are turned on simultaneously, 
the stop command is given. 

STR

Reverse rotation start

Turn on the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it off to stop.

RH, RM, RL

Multi-speed selection

Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.

MRS 

Output stop

Turn on the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.

 Terminal MRS is only available for the standard control circuit terminal model.

RES

Reset

Use to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn on the RES signal for 
more than 0.1s, then turn it off. It is possible to set the initial setting to "always enabled". By setting Pr. 
75
, reset can be set enabled only at fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.

SD

Contact input common

(sink) (initial setting)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.

External transistor 

common (source)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable currents.

24VDC power supply 

common

Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.

PC

External transistor 

common 

(sink) (initial setting)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable currents.

Contact input common 

(source)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).

24VDC power supply

Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.

Safety stop input 

terminal common 

Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.

 Terminals S1 and S2 are provided on the safety stop function model. For details, refer to the Safety

stop function instruction manual (BCN-A211508-004).

F

re

que

n

c

y

 s

e

tt

ing

10

Frequency setting 

power supply

Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency setting 
(speed setting) from outside of the inverter. 

5VDC
permissible load 
current 10mA

2

Frequency setting 

(voltage)

Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output 
frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output proportional. 
Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting) and 0 

to 10VDC input.

Input resistance 10k

 ± 1k

Permissible maximum voltage 
20VDC

4

Frequency setting 

(current)

Inputting 0 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V / 0 to 10V) provides the 
maximum output frequency at 20mA makes input and output 
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is on 
(terminal 2 input is invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is 
current input), set "4" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal 
function selection)
, and turn AU signal ON. Use Pr. 267 to switch from 

among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC and 0 to 10VDC. 
Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).

Voltage input: 
Input resistance 10k

 ± 1k

Permissible maximum voltage 
20VDC
Current input: 
Input resistance 233

 ± 5

Maximum permissible current 
30mA.

Standard control circuit 

terminal model

Safety stop function 

model

5

Frequency setting 

common

Common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 or 4). Do not earth (ground).

Saf

e

ty st

op

S1

Safe stop input

 (Channel 1) 

S1/S2 are safe stop signals for use with in conjunction with an 
approved external safety unit. Both S1/S2 must be used in dual 
channel form. Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/
opening between S1 and PC, S2 and PC.
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal PC 
by shortening wire.
Remove the shortening wire and connect the safety relay module 
when using the safety stop function.

 Terminals S1 and S2 are provided on the safety stop function

model. For details, refer to the Safety stop function instruction
manual (BCN-A211508-004).

Input resistance 4.7kW
Voltage when contacts are open
21 to 26VDC
Current when contacts are 
short-circuited
4 to 6mADC

S2

Safe stop input

 (Channel 2) 

Voltage input

Current input  

(initial status)

Voltage input

Current input  

(initial status)


background image

30

C

ont

ro

l c

ir

c

ui

t/

ou

tp

ut

 s

igna

l

Relay

A, B, C

Relay output 

(fault output)

1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs.
Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity 
across A-C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A (power factor = 0.4) 30VDC 0.3A

O

p

en

 co

ll

ecto

r

RUN

Inverter running

The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is 

equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5Hz). 

The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake 

operation. 

Permissible load 24VDC 
(Maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(a voltage drop is 3.4V 
maximum when the signal is on)

 An open collector transistor is 

ON (conductive) in LOW 
state. The transistor is OFF 
(not conductive) in HIGH 
state.

FU

Frequency detection

The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is 
equal to or higher than the preset detection frequency, and is in 
HIGH state when it is less than the preset detection frequency. 

SE

Open collector

output common

Common terminal of terminal RUN and FU.

Pul

s

e

FM

For meter

Select one e.g. output frequency from monitor items. (Not output 
during inverter reset.)

The output signal is proportional to the 

magnitude of the corresponding monitoring item.

Permissible load current 1mA
1440 pulses/s at 60Hz

Co

mm

un

ic

at

io

n

PU connector

With the PU connector, RS-485 communication can be made.
· Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)

· Transmission format: Multi-drop link

· Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps

· Overall extension: 500m

USB connector

USB connection with a personal computer can be established. Setting, monitoring and testing of the 
inverter can be performed using FR Configurator.
· Interface: conforms to USB1.1

· Transmission Speed: 12Mbps

· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note

Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting. Applying
a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch in "V" position
(voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output devices.

The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.

 indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 192 (I/O terminal function selection).

Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set. 

When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

31

(2) FL remote communication model (NF), CC-Link communication model (NC)

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

Mai

n

 ci

rcu

it

R/L1, S/L2, 

T/L3

AC power input

Connect to a commercial power supply.

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

P/+, PR

Brake resistor connection

Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type, MYS type) across terminals P/+ and PR.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K.)

P/+, N/-

Brake unit connection

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2).

P/+, P1

DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

C

ont

ro

l c

ir

c

ui

t

24V

 extern

al

 p

o

w

e

su

p

p

ly

+24

24V external power 

supply

Even when the main circuit power supply is OFF, FL-net 
communication continues with the input from the 24V external 
power supply.

Input voltage
23.5 to 26.5VDC
Input current
0.7A or less

SD

24V external power 

supply common terminal

Common terminal for the terminal +24

S

a

fety sto

p

 fu

n

c

ti

o

n

S1

Safety stop input

(Channel 1)

Terminal S1/S2 are safety stop signals for use with in conjunction 
with an approved external safety unit. Both terminal S1/S2 must be 
used in dual channel form.
Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/opening between 
S1 and PC, S2 and PC.
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with terminal 
PC by shorting wire. Remove the shorting wire and connect the 
safety relay module when using the safety stop function.

Input resistance 4.7kΩ
Voltage when contacts are open
21 to 26VDC
Current when contacts are 
short-circuited
4 to 6mADC

S2

Safety stop input

(Channel 2)

PC

Safety stop input terminal 

common

Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.

O

p

en

 co

ll

ecto

r

Y0

FL remote communication model (NF)

Permissible load 24VDC 
(maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(a voltage drop is 3.4V 
maximum when the signal is on)

 The open collector transistor 

is ON (conductive) in LOW 
state. The transistor is OFF 
(not conductive) in HIGH 
state.

Open collector output Y0

(safety monitor output 2)

The output is switched to HIGH state to activate the safety stop 

function when the safety circuit fault (E.SAF) occurs. Otherwise, 

the output is in LOW state. 

CC-Link communication model (NC)

Open collector output Y0

(Inverter running)

The output is in LOW state when the inverter output frequency is 
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial value: 0.5Hz). 
The output is in HIGH state during stop or DC injection brake 
operation. 

Use Pr. 190 RX2 (terminal Y0) function selection to change the 

function assigned to the terminal.

SE

Open collector output 

common

Common terminal of terminal Y0.

Co

m

m

u

n

icati

o

n

FL remote communication model (NF)

FL

-n

e

t

FL remote communication connector

With the FL remote communication connector, FL remote communication can be performed.

CC-Link communication model (NC)

CC-L

in

k

CONA

CONB

CC-Link communication 

connector

Pin arrangement

USB connector

The FR Configurator can be operated by connecting the inverter to the personal computer through USB.
· Interface: conforms to USB1.1

· Transmission Speed: 12Mbps

· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note

The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.

When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

CONA

CONB

1

5

3 2

4

Pin number

5

4

3

2

1

Signal name

SLD

NC

DG

DB

DA

One-touch connector for CC-Link communication

Model name

Manufacturer

A6CON-L5P

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation

35505-6000-B0M GF

3M Japan Limited


background image

32

(3) Ethernet communication function model (-NE)

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

Mai

n

 ci

rc

u

it

R/L1, S/L2, 

T/L3 *

AC power input

Connect to the commercial power supply. Keep these terminals open when using the high power 
factor converter (FR-HC2) or power regeneration common converter (FR-CV).

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

P/+, PR

Brake resistor 

connection

Connect a brake resistor (MRS type, MYS type, FR-ABR) across terminals P/+ and PR.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K)

P/+, N/-

Brake unit connection

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2), power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) or high power 
factor converter (FR-HC2).

DC power input

Connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and minus side to terminal N/-.

P/+, P1

DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

C

o

n

tr

o

l c

ir

c

ui

t/

inpu

t s

ig

n

a

l

C

o

nt

a

c

t in

put

STF

Forward rotation start

Turn ON the STF signal to start forward rotation and turn it OFF to 
stop.

When the STF and STR signals 
are turned ON simultaneously, 
the stop command is given. 

STR

Reverse rotation start

Turn ON the STR signal to start reverse rotation and turn it OFF to 
stop.

RH, RM, RL

Multi-speed selection

Multi-speed can be selected according to the combination of RH, RM and RL signals.

MRS

Output stop

Turn ON the MRS signal (20ms or more) to stop the inverter output.
Use to shut off the inverter output when stopping the motor by electromagnetic brake.

RES

Reset

Used to reset alarm output provided when protective circuit is activated. Turn ON the RES signal for 
more than 0.1s, then turn it OFF. Initial setting is for reset always. By setting Pr. 75, reset can be set to 
enabled only at fault occurrence. Recover about 1s after reset is cancelled.

SD

Contact input common

(sink) (initial setting)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (sink logic) and terminal FM.

External transistor 

common (source)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the source logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable current.

24VDC power supply 

common

Common output terminal for 24VDC 0.1A power supply (PC terminal).
Isolated from terminals 5 and SE.

PC

External transistor 

common 

(sink) (initial setting)

Connect this terminal to the power supply common terminal of a transistor output (open collector 
output) device, such as a programmable controller, in the sink logic to avoid malfunction by 
undesirable current.

Contact input common 

(source)

Common terminal for contact input terminal (source logic).

24VDC power supply

Can be used as 24VDC 0.1A power supply.

F

req

u

e

n

cy setti

n

g

10

Frequency setting 

power supply

Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for 
frequency setting (speed setting) from outside of the inverter. 

5VDC
permissible load current 10mA

2

Frequency setting 

(voltage)

Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output 
frequency at 5V (10V) and makes input and output proportional. 
Use Pr. 73 to switch between input 0 to 5VDC (initial setting) and 0 
to 10VDC input.

Input resistance 10k

 ± 1k

Permissible maximum voltage 
20VDC

4

Frequency setting 

(current)

Inputting 0 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V / 0 to 10V) provides the 
maximum output frequency at 20mA and makes input and output 
proportional. This input signal is valid only when the AU signal is 
ON (terminal 2 input is invalid). To use terminal 4 (initial setting is 
current input), set "4" to any of Pr.178 to Pr.184 (input terminal 
function selection)
, and turn AU signal ON. Use Pr. 267 to switch 
among input 4 to 20mA (initial setting), 0 to 5VDC, and 0 to 10VDC. 
Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select 
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to 10V).

Voltage input: 
Input resistance 10k

 ± 1k

Permissible maximum voltage 
20VDC
Current input: 
Input resistance 233

 ± 5

Maximum permissible current 
30mA.

5

Frequency setting 

common

Common terminal for the frequency setting signals (terminals 2 and 4). Do not earth (ground).

Voltage input

Current input  

(initial status)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

33

C

o

n

tr

o

l c

ir

c

ui

t/

o

u

tput

 s

igna

l

Relay

A, B, C

Relay output 

(fault output)

1 changeover contact output indicates that the inverter fault occurs.
Fault: discontinuity across B-C (continuity across A-C), Normal: continuity across B-C (discontinuity 
across A-C) Contact capacity 230VAC 0.3A (power factor = 0.4) 30VDC 0.3A

O

p

en

 co

ll

ecto

r

RUN

Inverter running

Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or 
higher than the starting frequency (initial value 0.5Hz). Switched 
High during stop or DC injection brake operation.

Permissible load 24VDC 
(Maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(a voltage drop is 3.4V 
maximum when the signal is on)
 Low is when the open

collector output transistor is
ON (conducts). High is when
the transistor is OFF (does
not conduct).

FU

Frequency detection

Switched Low when the inverter output frequency is equal to or 
higher than the preset detected frequency and High when less than 
the preset detected frequency.

SE

Open collector

output common

Common terminal of terminal RUN and FU.

Pu

lse

FM

For meter

Used to output a selected monitored item (such as Output 
frequency) among several monitored items. (Not output during 
inverter reset.)

The output signal is proportional to the magnitude of 

the corresponding monitoring item.

Permissible load current 1mA
1440 pulses/s at 60Hz

C

o

m

m

u

n

ica

tio

n

Ethernet connector

Communication can be made via Ethernet.
· Category: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T
· Data transmission speed: 100Mbps (100BASE-TX) / 10Mbps (10BASE-T)
· Transmission method: Baseband
· Maximum segment length: 100m between the hub and the inverter
· Number of cascade connection stages: Up to 2 (100BASE-TX) / up to 4 (10BASE-T)
· Interface: RJ-45
· Number of interfaces available: 1
· IP version: IPv4

PU connector

With the PU connector, RS-485 communication can be established.
· Conforming standard: EIA-485 (RS-485)

· Transmission format: Multi-drop link

· Communication speed: 4800 to 38400bps

· Overall extension: 500m

USB connector

Use the USB connector to communicate with a personal computer.

 Setting and monitoring of the 

inverter is enabled using FR Configurator2.

· Interface: conforms to USB1.1

· Transmission Speed: 12Mbps

· Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note

Set Pr. 267 and a voltage/current input switch correctly, then input an analog signal in accordance with the setting.
Applying a voltage with voltage/current input switch in "I" position (current input is selected) or a current with switch
in "V" position (voltage input is selected) could cause component damage of the inverter or analog circuit of output
devices.

The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.

 indicates that terminal functions can be selected using Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 and Pr. 190 to Pr. 192 (I/O terminal function

selection).

Terminal names and terminal functions are those of the factory set. 

When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description


background image

34

(4) Dedicated EtherCAT communication model (-TM)

By installing the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB), EtherCAT
communication is possible.

Type

Terminal 

Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

M

a

in

 c

ir

c

uit

R/L1, 
S/L2, 

T/L3

AC power input

Connect to the commercial power supply.

U, V, W

Inverter output

Connect a three-phase squirrel-cage motor.

P/+, PR

Brake resistor 

connection

Connect a brake resistor (FR-ABR, MRS type, MYS type) across terminals P/+ and PR.
(The brake resistor cannot be connected to the 0.1K or 0.2K.)

P/+, N/-

Brake unit connection

Connect the brake unit (FR-BU2).

P/+, P1

DC reactor connection

Remove the jumper across terminals P/+ and P1 and connect a DC reactor.

Earth (Ground)

For earthing (grounding) the inverter chassis. Must be earthed (grounded).

C

ont

ro

l c

ir

c

ui

t

24V extern

a

l p

o

w

e

s

u

p

p

ly

+24

24V external power 

supply

Even when the main circuit power supply is OFF, 
EtherCAT communication continues with the input from 
the 24V external power supply.

Input voltage 
23.5 to 26.5VDC
Input current 
0.7A or less

SD

24V external power 

supply common 

terminal

Common terminal for the terminal +24

S

a

fe

ty

 s

top f

unc

ti

o

n

S1

Safety stop input

 (Channel 1)

Terminal S1/S2 are safety stop signals for use with in 
conjunction with an approved external safety unit. Both 
terminal S1/S2 must be used in dual channel form. 
Inverter output is shutoff depending on shorting/
opening between S1 and PC, S2 and PC.
In the initial status, terminal S1 and S2 are shorted with 
terminal PC by shorting wire.
Remove the shorting wire and connect the safety relay 
module when using the safety stop function.

Input resistance 4.7k

Voltage when contacts are open
21 to 26VDC
Current when contacts are 
short-circuited
4 to 6mADC

S2

Safety stop input

 (Channel 2)

PC

Safety stop input 

terminal common

Common terminal for safety stop input terminals S1 and S2.

O

p

en

 co

ll

ecto

r

Y0

Open collector output 

Y0

(Inverter running)

Switched low when the inverter output frequency is 
equal to or higher than the starting frequency (initial 
value 0.5Hz). Switched high during stop or DC injection 
brake operation.
(Low indicates that the open collector output transistor 
is ON (conducts). High indicates that the transistor is 
OFF (does not conduct).)
Use Pr.190 Y0 terminal function selection to change the 
function assigned to the terminal.

Permissible load 24VDC
(maximum 27VDC) 0.1A
(a voltage drop is 3.4V 
maximum when the signal is 
ON)

SE

Open collector output 

common

Common terminal of terminal Y0.

US

B

USB connector

Use this connector for communication with a personal computer.

Interface: conforms to USB1.1

Transmission speed: 12Mbps

Connector: USB mini B connector (receptacle mini B type)

Note

The inverter will be damaged if power is applied to the inverter output terminals (U, V, W). Never perform such wiring.

When connecting the DC power supply, be sure to connect the plus side of the power supply to terminal P/+ and
minus side to terminal N/-. Opposite polarity will damage the inverter.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

35

Explanation of the Operation Panel

The operation panel cannot be removed from the inverter.



The External operation mode cannot be selected for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
communication model. (The EXT LED is OFF.) The NET LED turns ON at power-ON in the initial setting.



The operation is switched between the PU and NET modes for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated
EtherCAT communication model.

Operation mode indicator 



PU: Lit to indicate PU operation mode.
EXT: Lit to indicate External operation mode.

(Lit at power-ON at initial setting.)

NET: Lit to indicate Network operation 

mode.

PU, EXT: Lit to indicate External/PU 

combined operation mode 1, 2.

These turn OFF when command source is 
not on operation panel.

Unit indicator
Hz: Lit to indicate frequency.

(Blinks when the set frequency 
monitor is displayed.)

A: Lit to indicate current.
(Both "Hz" and "A" turn OFF when other 
than the above is displayed.)

Monitor (4-digit LED)
Shows the frequency, parameter number, 
etc.

Setting dial
(Setting dial: Mitsubishi Electric inverter dial)
Used to change the frequency setting and 
parameter settings.
Press to display the following.

Displays the set frequency in the 
monitor mode

Present set value is displayed during 
calibration

Displays the order in the fault history 
mode

Mode switchover
Used to change each setting mode.

Pressing  

simultaneously 

changes 

the operation mode. 
Pressing for a while (2s) can lock 
operation.

Determination of each setting
If pressed during operation, monitor 
changes as below;

Running frequency

Output current

Output voltage

Operating status indicator
Lit or blink during inverter operation. 

 Lit: When the forward rotation operation is

being performed.

Slow blinking (1.4s cycle): 

When the reverse rotation operation
is being performed.

Fast blinking (0.2s cycle):

When 

 was pressed or the

start command was given, but the
operation cannot be made.

When the frequency command is less 

than the starting frequency.

When the MRS signal is input.

Parameter setting mode
Lit to indicate parameter setting mode.

Monitor indicator
Lit to indicate monitoring mode.

Stop operation
Used to stop Run command.
Fault can be reset when protective 
function is activated (fault).

Operation mode switchover 



Used to switch between the PU and 
External operation mode.
When using the External operation mode 
(operation using a separately connected 
frequency setting potentiometer and start 
signal), press this key to light up the EXT 
indication.

(Press 

 simultaneously (0.5s) or 

change Pr. 79 setting to change to 
combined mode.)
PU: PU operation mode
EXT: External operation mode
Cancels PU stop also.

Start command
The rotation direction can be selected by 
setting Pr. 40.


background image

36

 The External operation mode cannot be selected for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT

communication model. (The EXT LED is OFF.) The NET LED turns ON at power-ON in the initial setting.

Basic operation of the operation panel

STOP

Operation mode switchover

Parameter setting

Fault history

Monitor/frequency setting

At power-ON (External operation mode)

PU operation mode

(output frequency monitor)

Parameter setting mode

PU Jog operation mode

Output current monitor

Output voltage monitor

The present 

setting displayed.

Value change

Value change

Parameter write is completed.

Parameter and a setting value 

appear alternately.

Parameter clear

All parameter

clear

Fault history clear

Initial value 

change list

(Example)

(Example)

Frequency setting has been 

written and completed.

 and frequency appear alternately.

[Operation for displaying fault history]

The last eight fault records can be displayed.
(On the display of the last fault record (fault record 1), a decimal point LED is ON.)
When the fault history is empty,                   is displayed.
While a fault is displayed:



The display shifts as follows by pressing           : Output frequency at the fault    

Output current    Output voltage    Energization time. 
(After Energization time, it goes back to a fault display.)



Pressing the setting dial shows the fault history number.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

37

Explanations of Parameter unit

The parameter unit is a convenient tool for inverter setting
such as direct input method with a numeric keypad,
operation status indication, and help function.

Eight languages can be displayed.

Parameter setting values of maximum of three inverters can
be stored.

With the FR-PU07BB(-L), parameter check and setting
change can be made without connecting a power supply to
the inverter. For the power supply, use AA nickel metal
hydride batteries, AA alkaline batteries, or an AC adapter.

Since the shape is specially designed for portable use, it is
easy to work with the FR-PU07BB(-L) in hand.

 The parameter unit connection cable FR-CB20 is required for connecting to

the inverter. (Parameter unit connection cable FR-CB203(3m) is enclosed  
with FR-PU07BB(-L).)

 To use a parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB) outside Japan, order

a "FR-PU07BB-L" (parameter unit type indicated on the package has L at the
end). Since enclosed batteries may conflict with laws in countries to be used
(new EU Directive on batteries and accumulators, etc.), batteries are not
enclosed with an FR-PU07BB-L.

 The parameter units (FR-PU07 or FR-PU07BB) cannot be used for the FL

remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the
dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

Main functions

 Available function differs by the inverter. Please refer to the instruction manual of the inverter and the parameter unit.

Parameter unit (FR-PU07), parameter unit with battery pack (FR-PU07BB(-L))

POWER lamp

Lit when the power turns on.

Monitor

Liquid crystal display

(16 characters   4 lines with backlight) 

Interactive parameter setting

Trouble shooting guidance

Monitor (frequency, current, power, etc.)

ALARM lamp

Lit to indicate an inverter alarm occurrence.

(Refer to the table on the right)

Operation keys

Battery indicator

The color turns orange 

when the battery is low. 

Green: Normal condition

Orange: Low battery (lasts 

50min.)

FR-PU07

FR-PU07BB(-L)

Key

Description

Use for parameter setting
Press to choose the parameter setting mode.
First priority monitor is displayed.
In the initial setting, the output frequency is displayed.

Operation cancel key

Used to display the function menu.
A variety of functions can be used on the function menu.

Used to shift to the next item in the setting or monitoring mode.

 to 

Used to enter a frequency, parameter number or set value.

Inverter operates in the External operation mode.

Used to select the PU operation mode to display the frequency 
setting screen.

 

Used to keep on increasing or decreasing the running 
frequency. Hold down to vary the frequency.

Press either of these keys on the parameter setting mode 
screen to change the parameter setting value sequentially.

On the selecting screen, these keys are used to move the cursor.

Hold down 

 and press either of these keys to advance 

or return the display screen one page.

Forward rotation command key.

Reverse rotation command key.

Stop command key.

Used to reset the inverter when an alarm occurs.

Used to write a set value in the setting mode.

Used as a clear key in the all parameter clear or alarm history 
clear mode.

Used as a decimal point when entering numerical value.

Used as a parameter number read key in the setting mode.

Used as an item select key on the menu screen such as 
parameter list or monitoring list.

Used as an alarm definition display key in the alarm history 
display mode.

Used as a command voltage read key in the calibration mode.

Function

Description

Monitor

6 types of monitors appear by simply pressing 

 .

Frequency setting

For PU operation mode and External/PU combined operation mode (Pr.79 = "3"), frequency setting is available.
Settings is performed by the direct setting, which sets frequency directly by 

 to 

, and the step setting, which 

sets frequency continuously by 

 

.

Parameter Setting

Reading parameter and changing setting values are easily done. To change the setting value of an parameter, specify 
the parameter number, or select a parameter from the functional parameter list.

Batch copy

FR-PU07 (PU07BB) reads parameter settings of an inverter, and stores three different parameter settings.
FR-PU07 (PU07BB) can also copy the stored parameter setting to another inverter of the same series, or verify its 
stored parameter setting against the parameter setting stored in an inverter.

Operation

Switching between External operation mode [EXT] and PU operation mode [PU] is easy.
Start/stop is enabled during PU operation mode and External/PU operation mode (Pr.79 = "3").


background image

38

FR Configurator (INVERTER SETUP SOFTWARE)

Desired functions can be

performed soon after start-up of

the software.
(1) Open the recent used 

System File

(2) Perform Easy Setup
(3) Perform each function

(4) Help

From station number to parameter setting, setting with

wizard style dialog (interactive) is available.

Procedure for Easy Setup
(1) System File setting

(2) Communication setting
(3) Inverter recognition

(4) Control method selection

(5) Motor setting
(6) Start command, frequency 

command setting

(7) Parameter setting

In Navigation area, switching ONLINE/

OFFLINE and changing operation mode can

be performed.
(1) Frequency setting and forward/reverse 

rotation 

 [Test operation]

(2) Display the connected inverter in tree 

view [System List]

(3) Function setting without regard to 

parameter number [Basic setting]

(4) Estimates the cause of trouble, and suggest 

counteraction. [Troubleshooting] 

In Monitor area, inverter status can be monitored.

(1) Displays monitor data in 

waveform
Displays current waveform 

with High Speed graph 

function [Graph] 

(2) Monitors the status of I/O 

terminals. [I/O Terminal 

Monitor]

(3) Displays multiple data in 

batch. [Batch Monitor]

In System area, parameter setting, Diagnosis, 

Troubleshooting, etc. can be performed.
(1) Parameter reading, 

writing, verification, 

Functional List and 
Individual List display are 

available.

[Parameter List]

(2) Displays alarm history 

and monitor value at 

each alarm occurrence. 
[Diagnosis]

(3) Parameter setting conversion from conventional 

models [Convert] 

Setting wizard can set parameters with wizard style dialog

(interactive). Inputting or selecting required items for each
function, parameter setting can be made, without regard to

parameter number.

Displays operating instructions and details of each

parameters.

 This function is not available with FR-SW3-SETUP-WE CC-Link Seamless.

FR-SW3-SETUP-WE

 



(Support for Windows

®

 10, Windows

®

 8.1/Pro/Enterprise, Windows

®

 8, Windows

®

 7 (32-bit/64-bit), and Windows Vista

®

 SP1 and above (32-bit))

FR Configurator software offers an easy operating environment.

Can be utilized effectively from inverter setting up to maintenance.
Parameter setting, monitoring, etc. can be performed on a display of Windows personal

computer.

A personal computer and an inverter can be easily connected with a USB cable.
(RS-485 communication 

 using PU connector is also available.)

The inverter on the CC-Link network can be set up via a programmable controller. (FR-

SW3-SETUP-WE CC-Link Seamless)



The FL remote communication model, the Ethernet 
communication function model, and the dedicated EtherCAT 
communication model do not support FR Configurator.



RS-485

RS-232C converter is required.

USB cable

USB connector

<How to open the USB connector cover>

Pull the cover in the direction of arrow.

Then turn it upward.

Startup

Easy Setup

Navigation area

Monitor area

System area

Setting wizard

Help

FR-SW3-SETUP-WE is available for download (free of charge) from the below URL on the internet. FR Configurator SW3 (FR-SW3-SETUP-
WE or FR-SW1-SETUP-WE) needs to be installed to the personal computer prior to updating the software. Also, user registration is required
for the download (free of charge.) (Registration is free of charge.)
Homepage address www.MitsubishiElectric.co.jp/fa
FR-SW3-SETUP-WE (for 700 series) and FR-SW1-SETUP-WE (500 series) can be installed from the FR Configurator SW3.
The FR-E700-NE supports FR Configurator2.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

39

Parameter List

For simple variable-speed operation of the inverter, the initial setting of the parameters may be used as they are. Set the
necessary parameters to meet the load and operational specifications. Parameter setting, change and check can be made
from the operation panel. For details of parameters, refer to the instruction manual.

REMARKS

 

 indicates simple mode parameters. (initially set to extended mode)

The shaded parameters in the table allow its setting to be changed during operation even if "0" (initial value) is set in 
Pr. 77Parameter write selection.
(The setting value of Pr. 77 cannot be changed via communication for the FL remote communication model or CC-Link
communication model.)

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting

B

a

sic f

unc

tions

 0

Torque boost

0 to 30%

0.1%

6/4/3/2% 



48

 1

Maximum frequency

0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

120Hz

48

 2

Minimum frequency

0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

48

 3

Base frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

48

 4

Multi-speed setting (high speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

48

 5

Multi-speed setting (middle speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

30Hz

48

 6

Multi-speed setting (low speed)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

10Hz

4866

 7

Acceleration time

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

5/10/15s

 



49

 8

Deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

5/10/15s

 



49

 9

Electronic thermal O/L relay

0 to 500A

0.01A

Inverter 

rated 

current

49

DC i

n

je

ct

ion 

brake

10

DC injection brake operation frequency 0 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

3Hz

49

11

DC injection brake operation time

0 to 10s

0.1s

0.5s

49

12

DC injection brake operation voltage

0 to 30%

0.1%

6/4/2%

 



49

13

Starting frequency

0 to 60Hz

0.01Hz

0.5Hz

49

14

Load pattern selection

0 to 3

1

0

50

JO

G

operat

ion

15

Jog frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

5Hz

50

16

Jog acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

0.5s

50

17

MRS input selection

0, 2, 4

1

0

50

18

High speed maximum frequency

120 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

120Hz

48

19

Base frequency voltage

0 to 1000V, 8888, 9999

0.1V

9999

48

A

ccel

e

ra

tion/

dec

el

e

rat

ion t

im

e

20

Acceleration/deceleration reference 
frequency

1 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

49

21

Acceleration/deceleration time 
increments

0, 1

1

0

49

St

a

ll

prev

ent

ion

22

Stall prevention operation level

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

51

23

Stall prevention operation level 
compensation factor at double speed

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

51

Mult

i-speed 

set

tin

g

24

Multi-speed setting (speed 4)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

25

Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

26

Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

27

Multi-speed setting (speed 7)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

29

Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

51

30

Regenerative function selection

0, 1, 2 



1

0

5154

F

requenc

y jum

p

31

Frequency jump 1A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

32

Frequency jump 1B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

33

Frequency jump 2A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

34

Frequency jump 2B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

35

Frequency jump 3A

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

36

Frequency jump 3B

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

37 



Speed display

0, 0.01 to 9998

0.001

0

52


background image

40

40

RUN key rotation direction selection

0, 1

1

0

52

F

requency

det

e

ct

io

n

41

Up-to-frequency sensitivity

0 to 100%

0.1%

10%

52

42

Output frequency detection

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

6Hz

52

43

Output frequency detection for reverse 
rotation

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

52

Sec

o

nd f

unct

ions

44

Second acceleration/deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s

0.1/0.01s

5/10/15s

 



49

45

Second deceleration time

0 to 3600/360s, 9999

0.1/0.01s

9999

49

46

Second torque boost

0 to 30%, 9999

0.1%

9999

48

47

Second V/F (base frequency)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

48

Second stall prevention operation current 0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

5166

51

Second electronic thermal O/L relay

0 to 500A, 9999

0.01A

9999

49

Monit

o

r f

unct

ions

52

DU/PU main display data selection

0, 5, 7 to 12, 14, 20, 
23 to 25, 52 to 56 



57 



, 61, 62, 100

1

0

53

54 



FM terminal function selection

1 to 3, 5, 7 to 12, 14, 21, 
24, 52, 53, 61, 62

1

1

53

55 



Frequency monitoring reference

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

53

56 



Current monitoring reference

0 to 500A

0.01A

Inverter 

rated 

current

53

A

u

to

m

a

tic

 

re

st

a

rt

 

 fu

n

cti

o

n

s

57

Restart coasting time

0, 0.1 to 5s, 9999

0.1s

9999

54

58

Restart cushion time

0 to 60s

0.1s

1s

54

59

Remote function selection

0, 1, 2, 3

1

0

55

60

Energy saving control selection

0, 9

1

0

55

A

u

to

m

a

tic

 

ac

celerat

ion/

decelerat

ion

61

Reference current

0 to 500A, 9999

0.01A

9999

55

62

Reference value at acceleration

0 to 200%, 9999

1%

9999

55

63

Reference value at deceleration

0 to 200%, 9999

1%

9999

55

65

Retry selection

0 to 5

1

0

56

66

Stall prevention operation reduction 
starting frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

51

Retry

67

Number of retries at fault occurrence

0 to 10, 101 to 110

1

0

56

68

Retry waiting time

0.1 to 360s

0.1s

1s

56

69

Retry count display erase

0

1

0

56

70

Special regenerative brake duty

0 to 30%

0.1%

0%

51

71

Applied motor

0, 1, 3 to 6, 13 to 16, 23, 
24, 40, 43, 44, 50, 53, 54

1

0

56

72

PWM frequency selection

0 to 15

1

1

57

73 



Analog input selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

57

74 



Input filter time constant

0 to 8

1

1

57

75

Reset selection/disconnected PU 
detection/PU stop selection

0 to 3, 14 to 17

1

14

57

77 



Parameter write selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

57

78

Reverse rotation prevention selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

57

 79 



Operation mode selection

0, 1, 2, 3 



, 4 



, 6, 7 



1

0

58

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

41

Mot

o

r cons

tant

s

80

Motor capacity

0.1 to 15kW, 9999

0.01kW

9999

59

81

Number of motor poles

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 9999

1

9999

59

82

Motor excitation current

0 to 500A (0 to ****), 9999

 



0.01A (1)



9999

59

83

Rated motor voltage

0 to 1000V

0.1V

200V/400V

 



59

84

Rated motor frequency

10 to 120Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

59

89

Speed control gain (Advanced 
magnetic flux vector)

0 to 200%, 9999

0.1%

9999

59

90

Motor constant (R1)

0 to 50

 (0 to ****) , 

9999

 



0.001

 (1) 

 



9999

59

91

Motor constant (R2)

0 to 50

 (0 to ****) , 

9999

 



0.001

 (1) 

 



9999

59

92

Motor constant (L1)/d-shaft inductance

0 to 1000mH (0 to 50

, 

0 to ****), 9999

 



0.1mH 

(0.001

, 1) 

 



9999

59

93

Motor constant (L2)/q-shaft inductance

0 to 1000mH (0 to 50

, 

0 to ****) , 9999

 



0.1mH 

(0.001

, 1) 

 



9999

59

94

Motor constant (X)

0 to 100% (0 to 500

, 0 

to ****) , 9999

 



0.1% 

(0.01

, 1) 

 



9999

59

96

Auto tuning setting/status

0, 1, 11, 21

1

0

59

PU connec

to

comm

unicat

ion

117 



PU communication station number

0 to 31 (0 to 247)

1

0

60

118 



PU communication speed

48, 96, 192, 384

1

192

60

119 



PU communication stop bit length

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

60

120 



PU communication parity check

0, 1, 2

1

2

60

121 



Number of PU communication retries

0 to 10, 9999

1

1

60

122 



PU communication check time interval

0, 0.1 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

0

60

123 



PU communication waiting time setting

0 to 150ms, 9999

1ms

9999

60

124 



PU communication CR/LF selection

0, 1, 2

1

1

60

 125 



Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 
frequency/frequency setting gain 
frequency 



0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

61

126 



Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

61

PI

D oper

at

ion

127 



PID control automatic switchover 
frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

61

128 



PID action selection

0, 20, 21, 40 to 43, 
50, 51, 60, 61

1

0

61

129 



PID proportional band

0.1 to 1000%, 9999

0.1%

100%

61

130 



PID integral time

0.1 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

1s

61

131 



PID upper limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

61

132 



PID lower limit

0 to 100%, 9999

0.1%

9999

61

133 



PID action set point

0 to 100%, 9999

0.01%

9999

61

134 



PID differential time

0.01 to 10.00s, 9999

0.01s

9999

61

PU

145 



PU display language selection

0 to 7

1

0

61

146

 



Built-in potentiometer switching

0, 1

1

1

61

147

Acceleration/deceleration time 
switching frequency

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

49

Current

 

det

ec

tion

150

Output current detection level

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

62

151

Output current detection signal delay time 0 to 10s

0.1s

0s

62

152

Zero current detection level

0 to 200%

0.1%

5%

62

153

Zero current detection time

0 to 1s

0.01s

0.5s

62

154

Voltage reduction selection during stall 
prevention operation

1, 11

1

1

51

156

Stall prevention operation selection

0 to 31, 100, 101

1

0

51

157

OL signal output timer

0 to 25s, 9999

0.1s

0s

51

 160

User group read selection

0, 1, 9999

1

0

62

161

Frequency setting/key lock operation 
selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

62

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

42

Aut

o

ma

tic 

res

tart

 

func

tions

162

Automatic restart after instantaneous 
power failure selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

1

54

165

Stall prevention operation level for 
restart

0 to 200%

0.1%

150%

54

168

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

169

Cum

u

lat

iv

e

 

m

o

nit

o

r clear

170

Watt-hour meter clear

0, 10, 9999

1

9999

53

171

Operation hour meter clear

0, 9999

1

9999

53

Us

er

gr

oup

172 



User group registered display/batch clear 9999, (0 to 16) 

1

0

62

173

User group registration

0 to 999, 9999

1

9999

62

174

User group clear

0 to 999, 9999

1

9999

62

Inpu

t t

e

rm

inal

 f

u

nct

ion ass

ignm

ent

178 



STF terminal function selection

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 
14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 
60, 62, 65 to 67, 9999

1

60

63

179 



STR terminal function selection

0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 
14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 
61, 62, 65 to 67, 9999

1

61

63

180 



RL terminal function selection/RY4 
function selection 



0 to 5, 7, 8, 10, 12, 
14 to 16, 18, 24, 25, 
62, 65 to 67, 9999

1

0

63

181 



RM terminal function selection/RY3 
function selection 



1

1

63

182 



RH terminal function selection/RY2 
function selection 



1

2

63

183 



MRS terminal function selection/RY9 
function selection 



1

24

63

184 



RES terminal function selection/RYB 
function selection 



1

62

63

O

u

tput

 t

e

rm

in

al

 f

u

n

ct

ion assignm

ent

190 



RUN terminal function selection/RX2 
(terminal Y0) function selection 



0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 
20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 
68

 



,80

 



, 81

 



 90, 91, 

93, 95, 96, 98, 99, 100, 
101, 103, 104, 107, 108, 
111 to 116, 120, 125, 
126, 146, 147, 164, 168

 



, 180

 



181

 



190, 

191, 193, 195, 196, 198, 
199, 9999

1

0

63

191 



FU terminal function selection/RX6 
function selection 



1

4

63

192 



A,B,C terminal function selection/RX7 
function selection 



0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 
20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 
68

 



, 80

 



, 81

 



 90, 91, 

95, 96, 98, 99, 100, 101, 
103, 104, 107, 108, 
111 to 116, 120, 125, 
126, 146, 147, 164, 168 



 180

 



181

 



 190, 

191, 195, 196, 198, 199, 
9999

1

99

63

M

u

lti-speed

 set

ting

232 



Multi-speed setting (speed 8)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

233 



Multi-speed setting (speed 9)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

234 



Multi-speed setting (speed 10)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

235 



Multi-speed setting (speed 11)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

236 



Multi-speed setting (speed 12)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

237 



Multi-speed setting (speed 13)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

238 



Multi-speed setting (speed 14)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

239 



Multi-speed setting (speed 15)

0 to 400Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

9999

48

240

Soft-PWM operation selection

0, 1

1

1

57

241 



Analog input display unit switchover

0, 1

1

0

61

244

Cooling fan operation selection

0, 1

1

1

64

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

43

S

lip 

com

p

ensat

ion

245

Rated slip

0 to 50%, 9999

0.01%

9999

64

246

Slip compensation time constant

0.01 to 10s

0.01s

0.5s

64

247

Constant-power range slip 
compensation selection

0, 9999

1

9999

64

249

Earth (ground) fault detection at start

0, 1

1

0

64

250

Stop selection

0 to 100s, 
1000 to 1100s 



8888 



, 9999

0.1s

9999

64

251

Output phase loss protection selection

0, 1

1

1

64

Lif

e

 diagnosis

255

Life alarm status display

(0 to 15)

1

0

65

256

Inrush current limit circuit life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

65

257

Control circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

65

258

Main circuit capacitor life display

(0 to 100%)

1%

100%

65

259

Main circuit capacitor life measuring

0, 1 (2, 3, 8, 9) 

1

0

65

Po

w

e

r

fa

ilu

re

st

op

261

Power failure stop selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

65

267 



Terminal 4 input selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

57

268

Monitor decimal digits selection

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

53

269

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

270

Stop-on contact control selection

0, 1

1

0

66

St

o

p

-o

n

cont

act

cont

rol

275

Stop-on contact excitation current low-
speed multiplying factor

0 to 300%, 9999

0.1%

9999

66

276

PWM carrier frequency at stop-on 
contact

0 to 9, 9999

1

9999

66

277

Stall prevention operation current 
switchover

0, 1

1

0

51

B

rake s

equence 

funct

ion

278 



Brake opening frequency

0 to 30Hz

0.01Hz

3Hz

66

279 



Brake opening current

0 to 200%

0.1%

130%

66

280 



Brake opening current detection time

0 to 2s

0.1s

0.3s

66

281 



Brake operation time at start

0 to 5s

0.1s

0.3s

66

282 



Brake operation frequency

0 to 30Hz

0.01Hz

6Hz

66

283 



Brake operation time at stop

0 to 5s

0.1s

0.3s

66

Droop

cont

ro

l

286

Droop gain

0 to 100%

0.1%

0%

67

287

Droop filter time constant

0 to 1s

0.01s

0.3s

67

292

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

0, 1, 7, 8, 11

1

0

55, 66

293

Acceleration/deceleration separate 
selection

0 to 2

1

0

55

295

Magnitude of frequency change setting 0, 0.01, 0.1, 1, 10

0.01

0

62

P

a

ssw

or

d

func

tion

296

Password lock level

0 to 6, 99, 100 to 106, 
199, 9999

1

9999

67

297

Password lock/unlock

(0 to 5), 1000 to 9998, 
9999

1

9999

67

298

Frequency search gain

0 to 32767, 9999

1

9999

59

299

Rotation direction detection selection 
at restarting

0, 1, 9999

1

0

54

O

u

tput

 t

e

rminal 

funct

ion 

assignm

ent

 313 



RX9 function selection

0, 1, 3, 4, 7, 8, 11 to 16, 
20, 25, 26, 46, 47, 64, 
68 



, 80 



, 81 



, 90, 

91, 93, 95, 96, 98, 99, 
100, 101, 103, 104, 107, 
108, 111 to 116, 120, 
125, 126, 146, 147, 164, 
168 



, 180 



, 181 



190, 191, 193, 195, 196, 
198, 199, 9999

1

9999

 314 



RXA function selection

1

9999

 315 



RXB function selection

1

9999

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

44

RS

-485 

com

m

unic

at

ion

338 



Communication operation command 
source

0, 1

1

0

68

339 



Communication speed command source

0, 1, 2

1

0

68

340 



Communication startup mode selection 0, 1, 10

1

0

58

342 



Communication EEPROM write selection 0, 1

1

0

60

343 



Communication error count

1

0

60

 349 



Communication reset selection

0, 1

1

0

Et

hernet

 

co

mm

unic

ation

 442 



Default gateway address 1

0 to 255

1

0

 443 



Default gateway address 2

0 to 255

1

0

 444 



Default gateway address 3

0 to 255

1

0

 445 



Default gateway address 4

0 to 255

1

0

S

e

cond 

mo

to

cons

tant

450

Second applied motor

0, 1, 9999

1

9999

56

Ou

tp

u

t

495 



Remote output selection

0, 1, 10, 11

1

0

68

496 



Remote output data 1

0 to 4095

1

0

68

497 



Remote output data 2

0 to 4095

1

0

68

C

o

mm

uni

ca

tion error

 500 



Communication error execution waiting 
time

0 to 999.8s

0.1s

0s

() 501 



Communication error occurrence count 
display

0

1

0

502 



Stop mode selection at communication 
error

0, 1, 2, 3

1

0

60

Maint

enance

503

Maintenance timer

0 (1 to 9998)

1

0

68

504

Maintenance timer alarm output set time

0 to 9998, 9999

1

9999

68

CC-Link

 541 



Frequency command sign selection 
(CC-Link)

0, 1

1

0

 542 



Communication station number (CC-
Link)

1 to 64

1

1

 543 



Baud rate selection (CC-Link)

0 to 4

1

0

 544 



CC-Link extended setting

0, 1, 12, 14, 18

1

0

US

B

547 



USB communication station number

0 to 31

1

0

69

548 



USB communication check time interval

0 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

9999

69

Co

mm

uni

cat

ion

549 



Protocol selection

0, 1

1

0

60

550 



NET mode operation command source 
selection

0, 2, 9999

1

9999

68

551 



PU mode operation command source 
selection



, 3, 4, 9999

1

9999

68

Curr

ent

 ave

rage 

tim

e

 m

o

n

ito

r

555 



Current average time

0.1 to 1.0s

0.1s

1s

69

556 



Data output mask time

0 to 20s

0.1s

0s

69

557 



Current average value monitor signal 
output reference current

0 to 500A

0.01A

Inverter 

rated 

current

69

563

Energization time carrying-over times

 (0 to 65535) 

1

0

53

564

Operating time carrying-over times

 (0 to 65535) 

1

0

53

571

Holding time at a start

0 to 10s, 9999

0.1s

9999

49

611

Acceleration time at a restart

0 to 3600s, 9999

0.1s

9999

54

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

45

Et

herCA

T

 

co

m

m

u

n

ic

a

tio

n

 

629 to 635, 

637 to 639 



Option information1 to 10

653

Speed smoothing control

0 to 200%

0.1%

0%

69

665

Regeneration avoidance frequency gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

69

Et

herC

A

T

 

co

mm

unicat

ion

 

690 to 697, 
738 to 746, 

753 to 768 



Option parameter1 to 33

0 to 65535

1

0

800

Control method selection

20, 30

1

20

59

Et

hernet

 c

o

mm

unicat

ion

 805 



Ethernet IP address 1

0 to 255

1

192

 806 



Ethernet IP address 2

0 to 255

1

168

 807 



Ethernet IP address 3

0 to 255

1

50

 808 



Ethernet IP address 4

0 to 255

1

1

 809 



Subnet mask 1

0 to 255

1

255

 810 



Subnet mask 2

0 to 255

1

255

 811 



Subnet mask 3

0 to 255

1

255

 812 



Subnet mask 4

0 to 255

1

0

 830 



Ethernet communication network 
number

1 to 239

1

1

 831 



Ethernet communication station 
number

1 to 120

1

1

 832 



Link speed and duplex mode selection

0 to 4

1

0

 833 



Ethernet function selection 1

0, 10, 20, 30, 31, 36, 38, 
9999

1

31

 834 



Ethernet function selection 2

1

20

 835 



Ethernet function selection 3

1

9999

 837 



Ethernet IP filter address 1

0 to 255

1

0

 838 



Ethernet IP filter address 2

0 to 255

1

0

 839 



Ethernet IP filter address 3

0 to 255

1

0

 840 



Ethernet IP filter address 4

0 to 255

1

0

 841 



Ethernet IP filter address 2 range 
specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

 842 



Ethernet IP filter address 3 range 
specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

 843 



Ethernet IP filter address 4 range 
specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

 844 



Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 1

0 to 255

1

0

 845 



 

Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 2

0 to 255

1

0

 846 



Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 3

0 to 255

1

0

 847 



Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 4

0 to 255

1

0

 848 



Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 3 range specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

 849 



Ethernet command source selection IP 
address 4 range specification

0 to 255, 9999

1

9999

 850 



Ethernet TCP disconnection time 
coefficient

1 to 7200

1

3600

 851 



Ethernet signal loss detection function 
selection

0, 2, 3

1

3

 852 



Ethernet communication check time 
interval

0 to 999.8s, 9999

0.1s

1.5s

859

Torque current

0 to 500A (0 to ****) , 
9999

 



0.01A (1)

 



9999

59

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

46

Pr

ot

ect

ive 

fu

n

cti

o

n

s

872

 



Input phase loss protection selection

0, 1

1

1

64

Regener

at

ion 

av

oi

dan

ce 

fu

nct

ion

882

Regeneration avoidance operation 
selection

0, 1, 2

1

0

69

883

Regeneration avoidance operation 
level

300 to 800V

0.1V

400VDC/

780VDC

 



69

885

Regeneration avoidance compensation 
frequency limit value

0 to 10Hz, 9999

0.01Hz

6Hz

69

886

Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

0 to 200%

0.1%

100%

69

Fr

e

e

pa

ramet

e

r

888

Free parameter 1

0 to 9999

1

9999

69

889

Free parameter 2

0 to 9999

1

9999

69

Calibrat

ion p

a

ram

e

te

rs

C0 (900) 



FM terminal calibration

70

C2 (902) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 
frequency/frequency setting bias 
frequency 



0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

61

C3 (902) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

61

125 (903) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting gain 
frequency/frequency setting gain 
frequency 



0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

61

C4 (903) 



Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

61

C5 (904) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

61

C6 (904) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 

0 to 300%

0.1%

20%

61

126 (905) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting gain 
frequency

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

61

C7 (905) 



Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

61

Calibrat

ion p

a

ram

e

te

rs

C22 (922) 



Frequency setting voltage bias 
frequency (built-in potentiometer)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

0Hz

61

C23 (922) 



Frequency setting voltage bias (built-in 
potentiometer)

0 to 300%

0.1%

0%

61

C24 (923) 



Frequency setting voltage gain 
frequency (built-in potentiometer)

0 to 400Hz

0.01Hz

60Hz

61

C25 (923) 



Frequency setting voltage gain (built-in 
potentiometer)

0 to 300%

0.1%

100%

61

PU

990 



PU buzzer control

0, 1

1

1

70

991 



PU contrast adjustment

0 to 63

1

58

70

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

47

C

le

ar param

et

ers

In

itial v

alue

 c

hange lis

t

 Pr.CL

Parameter clear

0, 1

 1

0

70

 ALLC

All parameter clear

0, 1

 1

0

70

 Er.CL

Fault history clear

0, 1

 1

0

70

 Pr.CH

Initial value change list

70



Differ according to capacities.
6%: 0.75K(SC) or lower
4%: 1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC)
3%: 5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)
2%: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)



Differ according to capacities. 
5s: 3.7K(SC) or lower
10s: 5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC)
15s: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)



Differ according to capacities.
6%: 0.1K(SC), 0.2K(SC)
4%: 0.4K(SC) to 7.5K(SC)
2%: 11K(SC), 15K(SC)



The initial value differs according to the voltage class. (100V, 200V class/400V class)



The range differs according to the Pr. 71 setting.



The setting is available for the safety stop function model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.



The setting is available for the safety stop function model (when equipped with the FR-E7DS), the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated
EtherCAT communication model.



Set this parameter when calibrating the operation panel built-in potentiometer for the FR-E500 series operation panel (PA02) connected with cable.



The parameter number in parentheses is the one for use with the operation panel (PA02) for the FR-E500 series or parameter unit (FR-PU07).

 Available only for the three-phase power input model.
 The settings of this parameter cannot be changed via communication on the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and

the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

 The settings of this parameter cannot be changed via communication on the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.
 This parameter in the FL remote communication model and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 This parameter in the FL remote communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 This parameter in the CC-Link communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 The parameter can be set only for the CC-Link communication model. For details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the CC-Link communication model

inverter.

 This parameter in the CC-Link communication model and Ethernet communication function model can be set. For the details, refer to the Instruction

Manual of the relevant model.

 The name differs depending on the model (standard control circuit terminal model, safety stop function model, CC-Link communication model, EtherCAT

communication model). For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the relevant model.

 This setting is available for the FL remote communication model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model

(other than the FL remote communication model this is a simple mode parameter). For the details, refer to the Instruction Manual of the relevant model.

 This setting is not available for the Ethernet communication function model.
 Setting of the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is possible with the EtherCAT communication option (E7NECT_2P manufactured by HMS

Industrial Networks AB) installed. For the details, refer to the dedicated EtherCAT communication model or the EtherCAT communication option
Instruction Manual.

 This parameter in the dedicated EtherCAT communication model is for manufacturer setting. Do not set.
 This parameter is only available for the Ethernet communication function model. For details, refer to the Ethernet communication function model

Instruction Manual.

Func-

tion

Parameter

Name

Setting Range

Minimum 

Setting 

Increments

Initial 
Value

Refer 

to 

Page  

Customer 

Setting


background image

48

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Explanations of Parameters

You can compensate for a voltage drop in the low-frequency
region to improve motor torque reduction in the low-speed region.

Motor torque in the low-frequency range can be adjusted to the load
to increase the starting motor torque.

Two kinds of starting torque boost can be switched by using RT
signal.

This function is valid for V/F control only.

Motor speed can be limited.

Clamp the upper and lower limits of the output frequency.

To perform operation above 120Hz, set the maximum output
frequency in Pr. 18.
(When Pr. 18 is set, Pr. 1 is automatically changed to the frequency
set in Pr. 18. Also, when Pr. 1 is set, Pr. 18 is automatically changed
to the frequency set in Pr. 1.)

Used to adjust the inverter outputs (voltage, frequency) to the motor
rating.

When running the standard motor, generally set the rated frequency
of the motor in Pr. 3 Base frequency. When running the motor using
electronic bypass operation, set Pr. 3 to the same value as the power
supply frequency.

When you want to change the base frequency when switching two 
types of motors with one inverter, use the Pr. 47 Second V/F (base 
frequency)

Use Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage  to set the base voltage (e.g. rated
motor voltage).

This function is valid for V/F control only.

Can be used to change the preset speed in the parameter with the
contact signals.
Any speed can be selected by merely turning on-off the contact
signals (RH, RM, RL, REX signals).

Operation is performed at the frequency set in Pr. 4 when the RH
signal turns on, Pr. 5 when the RM signal turns on, and Pr. 6 when
the RL signal turns on.

Frequency from 4 speed to 15 speed can be set according to the
combination of the RH, RM, RL and REX signals. Set the running
frequencies in Pr. 24 to Pr. 27, Pr. 232 to Pr. 239 (In the initial value
setting, speed 4 to speed 15 are unavailable)

 When "9999" is set in Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8), operation is

performed at frequency set in Pr. 6 when RH, RM and RL are turned OFF
and REX is turned ON.

The 

abbreviations 

in 

the 

explanations 

below 

indicate 

...V/F control, 

...advanced magnetic flux vector control,

...general-purpose magnetic flux vector control. (Parameters without any indication are valid for all control)

V/F

V/F

V/F

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

Manual torque boost 

Pr. 0 Torque boost

Pr. 46 Second torque boost

 If the Pr. 71 initial value is

changed to the setting for use
with a constant-torque motor,
the Pr. 0 setting changes to the
corresponding value in the
above table.

Maximum/minimum frequency

Pr. 1 Maximum frequency

Pr. 2 Minimum frequency

Pr. 18 High speed maximum frequency

0, 46

Pr.

V/F

V/F

V/F

Output voltage

Pr. 0

Pr. 46

Setting range

Base frequency

0

100%

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 0 Initial Value

When Using 

the Mitsubishi 

Electric 

Constant 

Torque Motor

0.1K to 

0.75K

6%

1.5K to 3.7K 4%

5.5K, 7.5K 3%

2%

11K, 15K

2%

1, 2, 18

Pr.

Output frequency 

(Hz)

Pr. 1

Pr. 18

Pr. 2

Frequency setting 

Clamped at the 
maximum frequency

Clamped at the 
minimum frequency

5, 10V

(20mA)

0

(4mA)

Base frequency, voltage 

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Pr. 19 Base frequency voltage

Pr. 47 Second V/F (base frequency)

Multi-speed setting operation

Pr. 4 Multi-speed setting (high speed)

Pr. 5Multi-speed setting (middle speed)

Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)

Pr. 24 Multi-speed setting (speed 4)

Pr. 25 Multi-speed setting (speed 5)

Pr. 26 Multi-speed setting (speed 6)

Pr. 27 Multi-speed setting (speed 7)

Pr. 232 Multi-speed setting (speed 8)

Pr. 233 Multi-speed setting (speed 9)

Pr. 234 Multi-speed setting (speed 10)

Pr. 235 Multi-speed setting (speed 11)

Pr. 236 Multi-speed setting (speed 12)

Pr. 237 Multi-speed setting (speed 13)

Pr. 238 Multi-speed setting (speed 14)

Pr. 239 Multi-speed setting (speed 15)

3, 19, 47

Pr.

V/F

V/F

V/F

Pr. 19

Output voltage (V)

Output frequency 
(Hz)

Pr. 3

Pr. 47

4 to 6, 24 to 27, 232 to 239

Pr.

ON

ON

ON ON ON ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON ON

ON ON

ON ON ON ON

RH

RM

RL

REX

∗1

ON ON ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Output frequency (Hz)

Speed 4

Speed 5

Speed 6

Speed 7

Time

Speed 8

Speed 9

Speed 10

Speed 11

Speed 12

Speed 13

Speed 14

Speed 15

Speed 1

(High speed)

Speed 2

(Middle speed)

Speed 3

(Low speed)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

49

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Used to set motor acceleration/deceleration time.
Set a larger value for a slower speed increase/decrease or a
smaller value for a faster speed increase/decrease.

Use Pr. 7 Acceleration time to set the acceleration time to reach Pr. 20
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
 from 0Hz

Use  Pr. 8 Deceleration time  to set the deceleration time taken to
reach 0Hz from  Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency.

When RT signal is off, automatic switching of the acceleration/
deceleration time is available with Pr. 147.

Set the current of the electronic thermal relay function to protect
the motor from overheat. This feature provides the optimum
protective characteristics, including reduced motor cooling
capability, at low speed.

This function detects the overload (overheat) of the motor, stops the
operation of the inverter's output transistor, and stops the output.

Set the rated current [A] of the motor in Pr. 9.
(If the motor has both 50Hz and 60Hz rating and the Pr. 3 Base
frequency
 is set to 60Hz, set the 1.1 times of the 60Hz rated motor
current.)

Set "0" in Pr. 9 to make the electronic thermal relay function invalid
when using a motor with an external thermal relay, etc. (Note that
the output transistor protection of the inverter functions (E.THT).)

When using a Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor
1) Set any of "1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54" in Pr. 71. (This provides a

100% continuous torque characteristic in the low-speed range.)

2) Set the rated current of the motor in Pr. 9.

When the RT signal is on, thermal protection is provided based on
the Pr. 51 setting.
Use this function when running two motors of different rated currents
individually by a single inverter. 

(When running two motors together,

use external thermal relays.)

The DC injection brake can be operated at a motor stop to adjust
the stop timing and braking torque.
When 0 is set in Pr. 11 or Pr. 12, DC injection brake is not
performed.

You can set the starting frequency and hold the set starting
frequency for a certain period of time.
Set these functions when you need the staring torque or want
smooth motor drive at a start.

Acceleration/deceleration time setting

Pr. 7 Acceleration time

Pr. 8 Deceleration time

Pr. 20 Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency

Pr. 21 Acceleration/deceleration time increments

Pr. 44 Second acceleration/deceleration time

Pr. 45 Second deceleration time

Pr. 147 Acceleration/deceleration time switching frequency

Motor protection from overheat 
(electronic thermal relay function)

Pr. 9 Electronic thermal O/L relay

Pr. 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay

7, 8, 20, 21, 44, 45, 147

Pr.

Running
frequency

Acceleration time

Pr. 7, Pr. 44

Deceleration time

Pr. 8, Pr. 45

Time

Pr. 20

(60Hz)

(Hz)

Output

frequency

Pr. 21

Setting

Description

0

(initial 

value)

Increments: 
0.1s
Range: 
0 to 3600s

Increments 
and setting 
range of 
acceleration/
deceleration 
time setting 
can be 
changed.

1

Increments: 
0.01s
Range: 0 to 
360s

Time

Acceleration time

Deceleration time

Output frequency

(Hz)

Set  

frequency

Slope set  

by 

Pr. 7

Slope set  

by 

Pr. 8

Slope set  

by 

Pr. 44 

(Pr. 45)

Slope set  

by 

Pr. 44

Pr. 147

setting

9, 51

Pr.

DC injection brake

Pr. 10 DC injection brake operation frequency

Pr. 11 DC injection brake operation time

Pr. 12 DC injection brake operation voltage

Starting frequency

Pr. 13 Starting frequency

Pr. 571 Holding time at a start

10 to 12

Pr.

Operation frequency

Time

Pr. 10

Time

Operation 
voltage

Pr. 12

DC injection

brake voltage

Operation time

Pr. 11

(Hz)

Output frequency

Pr. 12 Initial 

Value

When Using the 

Mitsubishi 

Electric Constant 

Torque Motor

0.1K, 0.2K 6%

0.4K to 3.7K 4%

5.5K, 7.5K 4%

2%

11K, 15K

2%

 If the Pr. 71 initial value is

changed to the setting for use
with a constant-torque motor, the
Pr. 12 setting changes to the
corresponding value in the above
table.

13, 571

Pr.

Output 

frequency (Hz)

Time

Pr. 13

Pr. 571 setting time

STF

ON

0

60

Setting 
range


background image

50

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

You can select the optimum output characteristic (V/F
characteristic) for the application and load characteristics. 
This function is valid for V/F control only.

You can set the frequency and acceleration/deceleration time for
jog operation. Jog operation can be performed from either of the
external or the PU operation mode.
Can be used for conveyor positioning, test operation, etc.

The inverter output can be shut off by the MRS signal. Also, logic
for the MRS signal can be selected.
When  Pr. 17 is set to "4", the MRS signal from external terminal
(output stop) can be changed to the normally closed (NC contact)
input, and the MRS signal from communication can be changed to
the normally open (NO contact) input.

V/F pattern matching applications 

Pr. 14 Load pattern selection 

Constant-torque load application 
(setting "0", initial value)

At or less than the base frequency, the
output voltage varies linearly with the
output frequency.

Set this value when driving the load
whose load torque is constant even if
the speed varies, e.g. conveyor, cart
or roll drive.

Variable-torque load application 
(setting "1")

At or less than the base frequency, the
output voltage varies with the output
frequency in a square curve.

Set this value when driving the load
whose load torque varies in proportion
to the square of the speed, e.g. fan or
pump.

Constant-torque load application (setting "2, 3")

Set "2" when a vertical lift load is fixed as power driving load at
forward rotation and regenerative load at reverse rotation.

 Pr. 0 Torque boost is valid during forward rotation and torque boost

is automatically changed to "0%" during reverse rotation. Pr. 46
Second torque boost
 is valid when the RT signal turns ON.

Set "3" for an elevated load that is in the driving mode during
reverse rotation and in the regenerative load mode during forward
rotation according to the load weight, e.g. counterweight system.

To assign the RT signal to a terminal, set "3" in any of Pr. 178 to
184 (input terminal function selection).

14

Pr.

V/F

V/F

V/F

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 14 = 0

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 14 = 1

For vertical lift loads
At forward rotation boost...

Pr. 0 (Pr. 46

 setting
At reverse rotation boost...0%

100%

Output voltage

Base frequency 

Output frequency (Hz)

Reverse  
rotation

Forward 
rotation

Pr. 0

Pr. 46

Pr. 14 = 2

For vertical lift loads

At forward rotation boost...0%

At reverse rotation boost...Pr. 0 (Pr. 46)

 setting

100%

Output voltage

Base frequency 

Output frequency (Hz)

Forward 

rotation

Reverse

rotation

Pr. 0

Pr. 46

Pr. 14 = 3

Jog operation

Pr. 15 Jog frequency

Pr. 16 Jog acceleration/deceleration time

Logic selection of output stop signal (MRS)

Pr. 17 MRS input selection

18

Refer to the section about Pr. 1.

19

Refer to the section about Pr. 3.

20, 21

Refer to the section about Pr. 7.

15, 16

Pr.

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 20

Pr. 15 Jog frequency 

setting range

Pr. 16

Forward

rotation

Reverse

rotation

ON

ON

ON

JOG signal

Forward rotation STF

Reverse rotation STR

Time

17

Pr.

MRS signal

Time

STF (STR)

signal

The motor coasts to stop

ON

ON

Setting value "0"

Setting value "2"

(initial value)

MRS
SD

Inverter

MRS
SD

Inverter

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

51

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

This function monitors the output current and automatically
changes the output frequency to prevent the inverter from tripping
due to overcurrent, overvoltage, etc. It can also limit stall
prevention and fast-response current limit operation during
acceleration/deceleration, driving or regeneration.
In addition, torque limit which limits the output torque to the
predetermined value can be selected.

Stall prevention
If the output current exceeds the stall prevention operation level, the
output frequency of the inverter is automatically varied to reduce the
output current.

Fast-response current limit
If the current exceeds the limit value, the output of the inverter is
shut off to prevent an overcurrent.

Set in Pr. 22 the percentage of the output current to the inverter rated
current at which stall prevention operation will be performed.
Normally set this parameter to 150% (initial value).

During high-speed operation above the rated motor frequency,
acceleration may not be made because the motor current does not
increase. If operation is performed in a high frequency range, the
current at motor lockup becomes smaller than the rated output
current of the inverter, and the protective function (OL) is not
executed even if the motor is at a stop.
To improve the operating characteristics of the motor in this case,
the stall prevention level can be reduced in the high frequency
range. This function is effective for performing operation up to the
high-speed range on a centrifugal separator etc. Normally, set 60Hz
in Pr. 66 and 100% in Pr. 23.

By setting "9999" (initial value) in Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed
, the stall prevention operation
level is constant at the Pr. 22 setting up to 400Hz.

Set Pr.154 = "11" when the overvoltage protective function (E.OV) 
activates during stall prevention operation in an application with 
large load inertia. Note that turning OFF the start signal (STF/STR) 
or varying the frequency signal during stall prevention operation may 
delay the acceleration/deceleration start.

Stall prevention operation and fast response current limit function 
can be restricted according to the operation condition using Pr. 156.

When Pr. 277 = "1", torque limit can be set. Torque limit level can be
set using Pr. 22.

You can set the acceleration/deceleration pattern suitable for
application.

When making frequent starts/stops, use the optional brake resistor
to increase the regeneration capability. (0.4K or higher)

Use a power regeneration common converter (FR-CV) for continuous
operation in regeneration status.
Use a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) for harmonic
suppression and power factor improvement. 
(The FR-CV/FR-HC2 can be used for the standard control circuit
terminal model or the safety stop function model.)

 The brake duty varies according to the inverter capacity.

 7.5K or lower/11K or higher

 Available only for the FR-E720-3.7K

Stall prevention operation

Pr. 22 Stall prevention operation level

Pr. 23 Stall prevention operation level
compensation factor at double speed

Pr. 48 Second stall prevention 
operation current

Pr. 66 Stall prevention operation 
reduction starting frequency

Pr. 154 Voltage reduction selection 
during stall prevention operation

Pr. 156 Stall prevention operation 
selection

Pr. 157 OL signal output timer

Pr. 277 Stall prevention operation 
current switchover

24 to 27

Refer to the section about Pr. 4.

22, 23, 48, 66, 154, 156, 157, 277

Pr.

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 22

When 

Pr. 23 = 9999

Pr. 66

400Hz

Stall prevention operation 

level (%)

Stall prevention operation level 
as set in 

Pr. 23

When 

Pr. 23 = "9999", the stall prevention 

operation level is as set in 

Pr. 22 to 400Hz.

Pr.

Acceleration/deceleration pattern

Pr. 29 Acceleration/deceleration pattern selection

Linear acceleration/deceleration (setting
"0", initial value)
For the inverter operation, the output
frequency is made to change linearly (linear
acceleration/deceleration) to prevent the
motor and inverter from excessive stress to
reach the set frequency during acceleration,
deceleration, etc. when frequency changes.

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration A
(setting "1")
For machine tool spindle applications, etc.
Used when acceleration/deceleration
must be made in a short time to a high-
speed range of not lower than Pr. 3 Base
frequency 
(fb).

S-pattern acceleration/deceleration B
(setting "2")
For prevention of load shifting in
conveyor and other applications.
Since acceleration/deceleration is always
made in an S shape from current
frequency (f2) to target frequency (f1),
this function eases shock produced at
acceleration/deceleration and is effective
for load collapse prevention, etc.

Selection of regeneration unit

Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection

Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty

Pr. 30 

Set Value

Pr. 70 

Set Value

Regeneration Unit

0

(initial 

value)



Brake resistor (MRS type, MYS type)
Brake unit (FR-BU2) 
Power regeneration common converter (FR-CV)
High power factor converter (FR-HC2)

1

6%

Brake resistor (MYS type)
 (When using at 100% torque 6%ED



10/6% 



High-duty brake resistor (FR-ABR)

2

High power factor converter (FR-HC2)
(when an automatic restart after 
instantaneous power failure is selected)

29

Pr.

(Hz)

Time

Setting value "0"

[Linear acceleration/

deceleration]

Output frequency

fb

(Hz)

Setting value "1"

[S-pattern acceleration/

deceleration A]

Output frequency

Time

f1

(Hz)

(Hz)

f2

Set frequency

Output frequency

Time

Setting value "2"

[S-pattern acceleration/

deceleration B]

30, 70

Pr.


background image

52

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Up to three areas may be set, with the jump frequencies set to either
the top or bottom point of each area.

The settings of frequency jumps 1A, 2A, 3A are jump points, and
operation is performed at these frequencies in the jump areas.

Frequency jump is not performed if the initial value is set to "9999".

During acceleration/deceleration, the running frequency within the
set area is valid.

The monitor display and frequency setting of the PU (FR-PU07)
can be changed to the machine speed.

To display the machine speed, set in Pr. 37 the machine speed for
60Hz operation.

 Machine speed conversion formula..........Pr.37 x frequency/60Hz

 Hz is displayed in 0.01Hz increments and machine speed is in 0.001.

Used to choose the direction of rotation by operating the RUN key of
the operation panel.

The inverter output frequency is detected and output at the output
signals.

The Pr. 41  value can be adjusted within the range 0% ±100% on the
assumption that the set frequency is 100%.

This parameter can be used to ensure that the running frequency
has been reached to provide the operation start signal etc. for
related equipment.

When the output frequency rises to or above the Pr. 42  setting, the
output frequency detection signal (FU) is output. This function can
be used for electromagnetic brake operation, open signal, etc.

When the detection frequency is set in Pr. 43, frequency detection
used exclusively for reverse rotation can also be set. This function is
effective for switching the timing of electromagnetic brake operation
between forward rotation (rise) and reverse rotation (fall) during
vertical lift operation, etc.

Avoid mechanical resonance points 
(frequency jump)

Pr. 31 Frequency jump 1A

Pr. 32 Frequency jump 1B

Pr. 33 Frequency jump 2A

Pr. 34 Frequency jump 2B

Pr. 35 Frequency jump 3A

Pr. 36 Frequency jump 3B

When it is desired to avoid 
resonance attributable to 
the natural frequency of a 
mechanical system, these 
parameters allow 
resonant frequencies to 
be jumped.

Speed display

Pr. 37 Speed display

Pr. 37

Setting

Output 

Frequency

Monitor

Set 

Frequency

Monitor

Frequency 

Setting

Parameter 

Setting

0 (initial 

value)

Hz

Hz

Hz

Hz

0.01 to 

9998

Machine 

speed 



Machine 

speed 



Machine 

speed 



RUN key rotation direction selection

Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction selection

Pr. 40 Setting

Description

0

Forward rotation

1

Reverse rotation

31 to 36

Pr.

Pr. 31

Pr. 32

Pr. 33

Pr. 34

Pr. 35

Pr. 36

Frequency jump

Set frequency (Hz)

37

Pr.

40

Pr.

Detection of output frequency (SU, FU signal)

Pr. 41 Up-to-frequency sensitivity

Pr. 42 Output frequency detection

Pr. 43 Output frequency detection for reverse
rotation

44, 45

Refer to the section about Pr. 7.

46

Refer to the section about Pr. 0.

47

Refer to the section about Pr. 3.

48

Refer to the section about Pr. 22.

51

Refer to the section about Pr. 9.

41 to 43

Pr.

Output frequency 

(Hz)

ON

Set frequency

Adjustment 
range

Pr.41

SU

Time

OFF

OFF

Output signal

Forward 
rotation

Reverse 
rotation

Time

Output frequency (Hz)

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

FU

Pr.43

Pr.42

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

53

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

The monitor to be displayed on the main screen of the control
panel and PU (FR-PU07) can be selected.

 Selected by the PU (FR-PU07)

 The motor torque display remains "0" under V/F control.

 The cumulative energization time and actual operation time are

accumulated from 0 to 65535 hours, then cleared, and accumulated
again from 0. When the operation panel is used, the time is displayed up
to 65.53 (65530h) on the assumption that 1h = 0.001, and thereafter, it is
added up from 0.

 The actual operation time is not added up if the cumulative operation

time before power supply-off is less than 1h.

 When using the PU (FR-PU07), "kW" is displayed.
 The setting is available for the standard control circuit terminal model or

the safety stop function model.

Writing "0" in Pr. 170 clears the cumulative power monitor.

You can check the numbers of cumulative energization time monitor
exceeded 65535h with Pr. 563 and the numbers of actual operation
time monitor exceeded 65535h with Pr. 564.

Writing "0" in Pr. 171 clears the actual operation time monitor.

When Pr. 52 is set to "100", the set frequency monitor is displayed
during a stop and the output frequency monitor is displayed during
operation. (The Hz LED blinks when stopping and is lit during
operation.)

 The set frequency displayed indicates the frequency to be output when

the start command is on. 
Different from the frequency setting displayed when Pr. 52 = "5", the value
based on maximum/minimum frequency and frequency jump is displayed.

Set the full-scale value of the monitor value output from terminal FM.

* Refer to the section about Pr. 52 for monitor names.

Change of DU/PU monitor descriptions 
Cumulative monitor clear

Pr. 52 DU/PU main display data selection

Pr. 54 FM terminal function selection

Pr. 170 Watt-hour meter clear

Pr. 171 Operation hour meter clear

Pr. 268 Monitor decimal digits selection

Pr. 563 Energization time carrying-over times

Pr. 564 Operating time carrying-over times

Types of 

Monitor

Unit

Pr. 52 Setting

Pr. 54 

(FM) 

Set 

Value

Full-scale 

Value

Operation 

Panel LED

PU Main 

Monitor

Output frequency

0.01Hz

0/100

1

Pr. 55

Output current

0.01A

0/100

2

Pr. 56

Output voltage

0.1V

0/100

3

100V, 200V class: 
400V
400V class: 800V

Fault or alarm 
indication

0/100

Frequency 
setting value

0.01Hz

5



5

Pr. 55

Motor torque 



0.1%

7



7

Rated torque of the 
applied motor 

 2

Converter

output voltage

0.1V

8



8

100V, 200V class: 
400V
400V class: 800V

Regenerative 
brake duty

0.1%

9



9

Brake duty set in Pr. 
30 
and Pr. 70 

Electronic 

thermal O/L 

relay load factor

0.1%

10



10

Electronic thermal 
relay function 
operation level

Output current 

peak value

0.01A

11



11

Pr. 56

Converter 

output voltage 

peak value

0.1V

12



12

100V, 200V class: 
400V
400V class: 800V

Output power

0.01kW

14



14

Rated inverter 
power 

 2

Input terminal 
status



Output terminal 
status



Cumulative 
energization 
time 



1h

20

Reference 
voltage output

21

Actual operation 
time 



1h

23

Motor load 
factor

0.1%

24

24

200%

Cumulative 
power

0.01kWh

*5

25

PID set point

0.1%

52

52

100%

PID measured 
value

0.1%

53

53

100%

PID deviation

0.1%

54

Inverter I/O 
terminal 
monitor

55

Option input 

terminal status 



56

Option output 

terminal status 



57

Motor thermal 

load factor

0.1%

61

61

Thermal relay 
operation level 
(100%)

Inverter thermal 

load factor

0.1%

62

62

Thermal relay 
operation level 
(100%)

52, 54, 170, 171, 268, 563, 564

Pr.

Pr. 268 

Setting

Description

9999 

(initial value)

No function

0

For the first or second decimal places (0.1 increments or 
0.01 increments) of the monitor, numbers in the first 
decimal place and smaller are rounded to display an 
integral value (1 increments).
The monitor value smaller than 0.99 is displayed as 0.

1

When 2 decimal places (0.01 increments) are monitored, 
the 0.01 decimal place is dropped and the monitor 
displays the first decimal place (0.1 increments).
When the monitor display digit is originally in 1 
increments, it is displayed unchanged in 1 increments.

Pr. 52

0

100

During 

running/stop

During stop

During 

running

Output 

frequency

Output 

frequency

Set frequency 

Output 

frequency

Output current

Output current

Output voltage

Output voltage

Fault or alarm 

indication

Fault or alarm indication

Reference of the monitor output from 
terminal FM

Pr. 55 Frequency monitoring reference

Pr. 56 Current monitoring reference

Monitor

*

Reference Parameter

Initial Value

Frequency

Pr. 55

60Hz

Current

Pr. 56

Inverter rated current

55, 56

Pr.

2400 

pulse/s

1440 

pulse/s

Output frequency 
reference
Output current 
reference

400Hz

Pr.56

Pulse speed(terminal FM)

Pr.55

500A


background image

54

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

You can restart the inverter without stopping the motor in the
following cases:

When power comes back on after an instantaneous power failure

When motor is coasting at start

When Pr. 162 = "1" (initial value) or "11", automatic restart operation
is performed in a reduced voltage system, where the voltage is
gradually risen with the output frequency unchanged from prior to an
instantaneous power failure independently of the coasting speed of
the motor.

When "0" or "10" is set in Pr. 162, the inverter smoothly starts after
detecting the motor speed upon power restoration. (The motor
capacity should be equal to or one rank lower than the inverter
capacity)
When using the frequency search, perform offline auto tuning. 
Also be noted that there is a wiring length limit. (Refer to page 89)

Even when the motor is rotating in the opposite direction, the
inverter can be restarted smoothly as the direction of rotation is
detected. (You can select whether to make rotation direction
detection or not with Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection selection at
restarting
.)

Restart operation after turning MRS (X10) signal ON then OFF can
be selected using Pr. 30. Set when restart operation after
instantaneous power failure is selected while using the high power
factor converter (FR-HC2).
(The FR-HC2 can be used for the standard control circuit terminal
model or the safety stop function model.)

Automatic restart operation after 
instantaneous power failure/flying start

Pr. 30 Regenerative function selection

Pr. 57 Restart coasting time

Pr. 58 Restart cushion time

Pr. 162 Automatic restart after 
instantaneous power failure selection

Pr. 165 Stall prevention operation level for restart

Pr. 299 Rotation direction detection 
selection at restarting

Pr. 611 Acceleration time at a restart

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

30

0 (initial value), 

1

When MRS (X10) turns ON then OFF
The motor starts at the starting frequency

2

When MRS (X10) turns ON then OFF
Automatic restart operation

57

0

1.5K or lower....... 1s,
2.2K to 7.5K ........ 2s,
11K or higher ...... 3s
The above times are coasting time.

0.1 to 5s

Set the waiting time for inverter-triggered 
restart after an instantaneous power failure.

9999

(initial value)

No restart

58

0 to 60s

Set a voltage starting time at restart.

162

0

Frequency search only performed at the 
first start

1 (initial value)

Reduced voltage start only at the first start
(no frequency search)

10

Frequency search at every start

11

Reduced voltage start at every start
(no frequency search)

165

0 to 200%

Considers the inverter rated current as 
100% and sets the stall prevention 
operation level during restart operation.

299

0 (initial value)

Without rotation direction detection

1

With rotation direction detection

9999

When Pr. 78 = 0, the rotation direction is 
detected.
When Pr. 78 = 1, 2, the rotation direction is 
not detected.

611

0 to 3600s

Acceleration time to reach Pr. 20 
Acceleration/deceleration reference frequency
 
at a restart.

9999

(initial value)

Acceleration time for restart is the normal 
acceleration time (e.g. Pr. 7).

30, 57, 58, 162, 165, 299, 611

Pr.

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Coasting time 
Pr. 57 setting

Restart cushion time

(Pr. 58 setting)

Power supply 

(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Motor speed N

(r/min)

Inverter output 

frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output 

voltage E (V)

* The output shut off timing differs according to the load condition.

*

Instantaneous (power failure) time

Power supply 
(R/L1, S/L2, T/L3)

Motor speed N
(r/min)

Inverter output 
frequency f (Hz)

Inverter output 
voltage E (V)

Coasting time 
(

Pr. 57 )

Speed 
detection time

+

Acceleration time 
at a restart 
(

Pr. 611 setting)

*

*   The output shut off timing differs 

according to the load condition.

Restart cushion time
(

Pr. 58 setting)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

55

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

If the operation panel is located away from the enclosure, you can
use contact signals to perform continuous variable-speed operation,
without using analog signals.

By merely setting this parameter, you can use the acceleration,
deceleration and setting clear functions of the motorized speed
setter (FR-FK).

 External running frequency (other than multi-speed) or PU running

frequency 

Without a fine parameter setting, the inverter automatically
performs energy saving operation. This function is optimum for fan
and pump applications. This function is valid for V/F control only.

 Output current may slightly increase, since output voltage is controlled.

The inverter automatically sets appropriate parameters for
operation.

The inverter operates in the same conditions as when appropriate
values are set in each parameter even if  acceleration/deceleration
time and V/F pattern are not set. This operation mode is useful when
you just want to operate, etc. without fine parameter setting.

If the automatic acceleration/deceleration has been selected,
inputting the jog or RT (second function selection) signal during an
inverter stop will switch to the normal operation and give priority to
JOG operation or second function selection.
After automatic acceleration/deceleration operation has been
started, none of JOG signal and RT signal are accepted.

Use Pr. 61 to Pr. 63 to change the reference current for the shortest
acceleration/deceleration mode and optimum acceleration/
deceleration mode. 

Calculation of acceleration/deceleration can be performed
individually. This function is made valid in the shortest acceleration/
deceleration mode.

Remote setting function

Pr. 59 Remote function selection

Pr. 59 Setting

Description

RH, RM, RL signal 

function

Frequency setting 

storage function

0 (initial value)

Multi-speed setting

1

Remote setting

With

2

Remote setting

Not used

3

Remote setting

Not used

(Turning off STF/STR clears 

remotely set frequency)

Energy saving control selection 

Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection

Pr. 60 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Normal operation mode

9

Optimum excitation control mode
The optimum excitation control mode is a control 
system which controls excitation current to improve the 
motor efficiency to maximum and determines output 
voltage as an energy saving system. 

59

Pr.

0

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

ON

Deceleration

 (RM)

Clear (RL)

Acceleration

 (RH)

Forward rotation

 (STF)

Power supply

0Hz

Time

Output frequency (Hz)

When 

Pr. 59 = 1

When 

Pr. 59 = 2, 3

When 

Pr. 59 = 1, 2

When 

Pr. 59 = 3

60

Pr.

V/F

V/F

V/F

Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Pr. 61 Reference current

Pr. 62 Reference value at acceleration

Pr. 63 Reference value at deceleration

Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

Pr. 293 Acceleration/deceleration separate selection

Pr. 292 

Setting

Operation

Automatic 

Setting

Parameter

0

(initial value 

normal mode)

1

(shortest 

acceleration/

deceleration 

mode)

Without brake 
resistor and 
brake unit

Set when you want 
to accelerate/
decelerate the motor 
for the shortest time.
(stall prevention 
operation level 
150%)

Pr. 7, Pr. 8

11

(shortest 

acceleration/

deceleration 

mode)

With brake 
resistor and 
brake unit

7

(brake sequence 

mode 1)

With 
mechanical 
brake opening 
completion 
signal input

Operation mode in 
which a mechanical 
brake operation 
timing signal for 
vertical lift 
applications is 
output.
(The setting is not 
available for the FL 
remote 
communication 
model.)

8

(brake sequence 

mode 2)

Without 
mechanical 
brake opening 
completion 
signal input

Pr. 293 Setting

Description

0 (initial value) 

Both acceleration/deceleration time is calculated.

1

Only acceleration time is calculated.

2

Only deceleration time is calculated.

61 to 63, 292, 293

Pr.


background image

56

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

If a fault occurs, the inverter resets itself automatically to restart.
You can also select the fault description for a retry.
When you have selected automatic restart after instantaneous
power failure (Pr. 57 Restart coasting time 

 9999), restart operation

is performed at the retry operation time which is the same of that of
a power failure.

Use Pr. 65 to select the fault to be activated for retries.

"

" indicates the alarms selected for retry.

Set the number of retries at fault occurrence in Pr. 67.

Use Pr. 68 to set the waiting time from when the inverter trips until a
retry is made in the range 0.1 to 360s.

Reading the Pr. 69 value provides the cumulative number of
successful restart times made by retry. (Use setting value "0" to
clear.)

Setting of the used motor selects the thermal characteristic
appropriate for the motor. Setting is required to use a constant-
torque motor. Thermal characteristic of the electronic thermal relay
function suitable for the motor is set.

 Star connection

 Delta connection

For the 5.5K and 7.5K, the Pr. 0 Torque boost and Pr. 12 DC injection
brake operation voltage
 settings are automatically changed according
to the Pr. 71 settings as follows.

 Pr. 71 setting: 0, 3 to 6, 23, 24, 40, 43, 44

 Pr. 71 setting: 1, 13 to 16, 50, 53, 54

Retry function at fault occurrence

Pr. 65 Retry selection

Pr. 67 Number of retries at fault occurrence

Pr. 68 Retry waiting time

Pr. 69 Retry count display erase

Fault Display 

for Retry

Pr. 65 Setting

0

1

2

3

4

5

E.OC1

E.OC2

E.OC3

E.OV1

E.OV2

E.OV3

E.THM

E.THT

E. BE

E. GF

E.OHT

E.OLT

E.OP1

E. PE

E.MB4

E.MB5

E.MB6

E.MB7

E.USB

E.ILF

Pr. 67 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

No retry function

1 to 10

Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.

A fault output is not provided during retry operation.

101 to 110

Set the number of retries at fault occurrence.

(The setting value of minus 100 is the number of 

retries.)

A fault output is provided during retry operation.

66

Refer to the section about Pr. 22.

67 to 69

Refer to the section about Pr. 65.

70

Refer to the section about Pr. 30.

65, 67 to 69

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.

Motor selection (applied motor)

Pr. 71 Applied motor

Pr. 450 Second applied motor

Pr. 71, 

Pr. 450 

Setting

Used Motor

Thermal Characteristic 

of the Electronic 

Thermal Relay Function

Pr. 71 Pr. 450

Standard

Constant-torque

0

Standard motor (such as SF-JR)
(Pr. 71 initial value)

1

Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque 
motor (such as SF-JRCA)

40

Mitsubishi Electric high-efficiency 
motor (SF-HR)

50

Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque 
motor (SF-HRCA)

3

Standard motor

Select "Offline 

auto tuning 

setting"

13

Constant-torque 
motor

23

Mitsubishi Electric 
standard motor
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW 
or lower)

43

Mitsubishi Electric 
high efficiency 
motor (SF-HR)

53

Mitsubishi Electric 
constant-torque 
motor (SF-HRCA)

4

Standard motor

Auto tuning 

data can 

be read, 

changed, 

and set.

14

Constant-torque 
motor

24

Mitsubishi Electric 
standard motor
(SF-JR 4P 1.5kW 
or lower)

44

Mitsubishi Electric 
high efficiency 
motor (SF-HR)

54

Mitsubishi Electric 
constant-torque 
motor (SF-HRCA)

5

Standard motor 



Direct input 

of motor 

constants is 

enabled

15

Constant-torque 
motor 



6

Standard motor 



16

Constant-torque 
motor 



9999 Without second applied motor (Pr. 450 initial value)

Automatic Change 

Parameter

Standard Motor 

Setting



Constant-torque 

Motor Setting 



Pr. 0

3%

2%

Pr. 12

4%

2%

71, 450

Pr.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

57

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

You can change the motor sound.

You can select the function that switches between forward rotation
and reverse rotation according to the analog input terminal
specifications and analog input level.

Either voltage input (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) or current input (4 to 20mA)
can be selected for terminals 4 used for analog input.
Set the voltage/current input switch in the "V" position to select
voltage input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" position to select current input
(4 to 20mA), and change the parameter setting (Pr. 267).

 indicates main speed setting)

The time constant of the primary delay filter can be set for the
external frequency command (analog input (terminal 2, 4) signal).
 Effective for filtering noise in the frequency setting circuit.
 Increase the filter time constant if steady operation cannot be

performed due to noise. A larger setting results in slower
response. (The time constant can be set between approximately
5ms to 1s with the setting of 0 to 8.)

You can select the reset input acceptance, disconnected PU (FR-
PU07) connector detection function and PU stop function.

Reset selection
You can select the operation timing of reset function (RES signal,
reset command through communication) input.

Disconnected PU detection
This function detects that the PU (FR-PU07) has been disconnected
from the inverter for longer than 1s and causes the inverter to
provide a fault output (E.PUE) and come to trip. (This function
cannot be used for the FL remote communication model and the
CC-Link communication model.)

PU stop selection
In any of the PU operation, External operation and Network
operation modes, the motor can be stopped by pressing

of the

PU.

You can select whether write to various parameters can be
performed or not. Use this function to prevent parameter values
from being rewritten by misoperation.

This function can prevent reverse rotation fault resulting from the
incorrect input of the start signal.

Carrier frequency and Soft-PWM 
selection

Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection

Pr. 240 Soft-PWM operation selection

Pr. 

Number

Setting

Range

Description

72

0 to 15

PWM carrier frequency can be changed. The 
setting is in [kHz].
Note that 0 indicates 0.7kHz and 15 indicates 
14.5kHz.

240

0

Soft-PWM is invalid

1

When Pr. 72 = "0 to 5", Soft-PWM is valid.

Analog input selection

Pr. 73 Analog input selection

Pr. 267 Terminal 4 input selection

Pr. 73 

Setting

Terminal 2 

Input

Terminal 4 Input

Reversible 

Operation

0

0 to 10V

When the AU signal is off

Not function

1

(initial value)

0 to 5V

10

0 to 10V

Yes

11

0 to 5V

0

When the AU signal is on

According to Pr. 267 setting
0:4 to 20mA (initial value)

1:0 to 5V

2:0 to 10V

Not function

1

(initial value)

10

Yes

11

Response level of analog input and 
noise elimination

Pr. 74 Input filter time constant

72, 240

Pr.

73, 267

Pr.

2.5V

C3 (Pr.902)

Pr. 125

C4 (Pr.903)

C2 (Pr. 902)

5V

Reverse 

rotation

Forward 

rotation

 Set frequency (Hz)

Terminal 2 

input (V)

0

Frequency setting signal

Not 

reversible

Reversible

74

Pr.

Reset selection, disconnected PU 
detection

Pr. 75 Reset selection/disconnected PU
detection/PU stop selection

Pr. 75

Setting

Reset Selection

Disconnected 

PU Detection

PU Stop 

Selection

0

Reset input normally 
enabled

If the PU is 
disconnected, 
operation will be 
continued.

Pressing  

decelerates the 
motor to a stop 
only in the PU 
operation mode.

1

Reset input is enabled 
only when a fault occurs.

2

Reset input normally 
enabled

When the PU is 
disconnected, 
the inverter 
output is shut off.

3

Reset input is enabled 
only when a fault occurs.

14

(initial 

value)

Reset input normally 
enabled

If the PU is 
disconnected, 
operation will be 
continued.

Pressing  

decelerates the 
motor to a stop in 
any of the PU, 
external and 
communication 
operation modes.

15

Reset input is enabled 
only when a fault occurs.

16

Reset input normally 
enabled

When the PU is 
disconnected, 
the inverter 
output is shut off.

17

Reset input is enabled 
only when a fault occurs.

Prevention of parameter rewrite

Pr. 77 Parameter write selection

Pr. 77 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Write is enabled only during a stop.

1

Parameter cannot be written.

2

Parameter writing is enabled in any operation mode 
regardless of operation status. (There are some 
parameters that cannot be written.)

Prevention of reverse rotation of the 
motor

Pr. 78 Reverse rotation prevention selection

Pr. 78 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Both forward and reverse rotations allowed

1

Reverse rotation disabled

2

Forward rotation disallowed

75

Pr.

77

Pr.

78

Pr.


background image

58

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Used to select the operation mode of the inverter.
Mode can be changed as desired between operation using external
signals (external operation), operation from the PU (FR-PU07),
combined operation of PU operation and external operation
(external/PU combined operation), and network operation (when
RS-485 communication or a communication option is used)
(For the CC-Link communication model, the operation can be
switched between the NET and PU modes.)

.

Specify the operation mode at power on (Pr. 340) 

When power is switched on or when power comes back on after
instantaneous power failure, the inverter can be started up in the
Network operation mode. After the inverter has started up in the
Network operation mode, parameter write and operation can be
performed from a program.
Set this mode for communication operation using the inverter RS-
485 communication or communication option.

You can set the operation mode at power on (reset) according to
the Pr. 79 and Pr. 340 settings.

Operation mode selection

Pr. 79 Operation mode selection

Pr. 340 Communication startup mode selection

Pr. 79

Setting

Description

LED Indication

: OFF

: ON

0

(initial 

value)

Use external/PU switchover mode 

(press

to switch between the PU and 

External operation mode.
At power on, the inverter is placed in the 
External operation mode.

PU operation 
mode

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

1

Fixed to PU operation mode

PU operation 
mode

2

Fixed to External operation mode
Operation can be performed by switching 
between the external and Net operation 
mode.

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

3

External/PU combined operation mode 1

External/PU 
combined 
operation mode

Frequency command

Start command

Operation panel and 
PU (FR-PU07) setting 
or external signal input 
(multi-speed setting, 
across terminals 4-5 
(valid when AU signal 
turns on)).

External signal 
input
(terminal STF, 
STR)

4

External/PU combined operation mode 2

Frequency command

Start command

External signal input
(terminal 2, 4, JOG, 
multi-speed selection, 
etc.)

Input from the 
operation panel 
and the PU (FR-
PU07)

(

)

6

Switchover mode
Switch among PU operation, external 
operation, and NET operation while 
keeping the same operating status.

PU operation 
mode

External 
operation mode

NET operation 
mode

7

External operation mode (PU operation 

interlock)

X12 signal ON

Operation mode can be switched to the 

PU operation mode.

(output stop during external operation)

X12 signal OFF

Operation mode cannot be switched to 

the PU operation mode.

79, 340

Pr.

Pr. 340

Setting

Pr. 79

Setting

Operation Mode at 

Power-on, Power 

Restoration, 

Reset

Operation Mode 

Switching

0

(initial 

value)

As set in Pr. 79.

1

0

NET operation mode

Can be switched to 
external, PU or NET 
operation mode



1

PU operation mode

Fixed to PU operation 
mode

2

NET operation mode

Switching between the 
external and NET 
operation mode is 
enabled
Switching to PU 
operation mode disabled

3, 4

External/PU combined 
operation mode

Operation mode 
switching disabled

6

NET operation mode

Switching among the 
external, PU, and NET 
operation mode is 
enabled while running.

7

X12 (MRS) signal ON

..NET operation mode

Can be switched to 
external, PU or NET 
operation mode



X12 (MRS) signal ON

..External operation 

mode

Fixed to External 
operation mode (forcibly 
switched to External 
operation mode)

10

0

NET operation mode

Switching between the 
PU and Net operation 
mode is enabled



1

PU operation mode

Fixed to PU operation 
mode

2

NET operation mode

Fixed to NET operation 
mode

3, 4

External/PU 
combined operation 
mode

Operation mode 
switching disabled

6

NET operation mode

Switching between the 
PU and NET operation 
mode is enabled while 
running



7

External operation 
mode

Fixed to External 
operation mode (forcibly 
switched to External 
operation mode)

 Operation mode cannot be directly changed between the PU operation

mode and Network operation mode 

 Operation mode can be changed between the PU operation mode and

Network operation mode with 

 key of the operation panel and X65

signal.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

59

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Advanced magnetic flux vector control and general-purpose
magnetic flux vector control can be selected by setting the motor
capacity, number of poles in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81. Selection of
advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose
magnetic flux vector control can be made by Pr. 800.

The motor speed fluctuation at load fluctuation can be adjusted
using Pr. 89.

Offline auto tuning operation for automatic calculation of motor
constants can be executed when using advanced magnetic flux
vector control and general-purpose magnetic flux vector control.
When offline auto tuning is performed under V/F control, Pr. 298
Frequency search gain 
necessary for frequency search for automatic
restart after instantaneous power failure is set as well as the motor
constants (R1).

You can copy the offline auto tuning data (motor constants) to
another inverter with the PU (FR-PU07).

Even if a motor other than the Mitsubishi Electric standard motor
(SF-JR 0.2kW or higher), high-efficiency motor (SF-HR 0.2kW or
higher), or Mitsubishi Electric constant-torque motor (SF-JRCA 4P,
SF-HRCA 0.2 to 15kW) (such as other manufacturer's motor or SF-
JRC motor) is used, or the wiring length is long (30m or more as a
reference), a motor can run with the optimum operation
characteristics by using the offline auto tuning function.

Offline auto tuning conditions

A motor should be connected.

The motor capacity is equal to or one rank lower than the inverter
capacity.
(note that the capacity should be 0.1kW or more)

The maximum frequency is 120Hz.

A high-slip motor, high-speed motor and special motor cannot be
tuned.

As the motor may run slightly, fix the motor securely with a
mechanical brake or make sure that there will be no problem in
safety if the motor runs.
* This instruction must be followed especially in elevator.
Note that if the motor runs slightly, tuning performance is unaffected.

Selection of control method and control 
mode 

Pr. 80 Motor capacity

Pr. 81 Number of motor poles

Pr. 89 Speed control gain (Advanced magnetic flux
vector)

Pr. 800 Control method selection

Parameter

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

80

0.1 to 15kW

Set the applied motor capacity.

9999

(initial value)

V/F control

81

2, 4, 6, 8, 10

Set the number of motor poles.

9999

(initial value)

V/F control

800

20

(initial value)

Advanced magnetic flux vector control 

30

General-purpose magnetic flux vector 
control 

 Set a value other than "9999" in Pr. 80 and Pr. 81.

80, 81, 89, 800

Pr.

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

Offline auto tuning

Pr. 82 Motor excitation current

Pr. 83 Rated motor voltage

Pr. 84 Rated motor frequency

Pr. 90 Motor constant (R1)

Pr. 91 Motor constant (R2)

Pr. 92 Motor constant (L1)/d-shaft
inductance

Pr. 93 Motor constant (L2)/q-shaft
inductance

Pr. 94 Motor constant (X)

Pr. 96 Auto tuning setting/status

Pr. 298 Frequency search gain

Pr. 859 Torque current

Parameter

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

96

0

(initial 

value)

Without offline auto tuning

1

Offline auto tuning for advanced magnetic 
flux vector control

11

Offline auto tuning for general-purpose 
magnetic flux vector control
(compatible with FR-E500 series)

21

Offline auto tuning for V/F control
(automatic restart after instantaneous power 
failure (with frequency search))

89

Refer to the section about Pr. 80.

82 to 84, 90 to 94, 96, 298, 859

Pr.

Pr.


background image

60

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

(1) Initial settings and specifications of RS-485

communication (Pr. 117 to Pr. 124)

Used to perform required settings for RS-485 communication
between the inverter and personal computer.

 Use PU connector of the inverter for communication.

 You can perform parameter setting, monitoring, etc. using

the Mitsubishi inverter protocol or MODBUS RTU protocol.

 To make communication between the personal computer

and inverter, initialization of the communication
specifications must be made to the inverter.
Data communication cannot be made if the initial settings
are not made or there is any setting error.

 When making communication through MODBUS RTU protocol (Pr. 549 =

"1"), the setting range within parenthesis is applied.

(2) Communication EEPROM write selection (Pr. 342)

When parameter write is performed from the inverter PU
connector, USB communication, and communication option,
parameters storage device can be changed from EEPROM +
RAM to RAM only. Set when a frequent parameter change is
necessary.

(3) MODBUS RTU communication specifications (Pr.

343, Pr. 549)

Communication initial setting

Pr. 117 PU communication station number

Pr. 118 PU communication speed

Pr. 119 PU communication stop bit length

Pr. 120 PU communication parity check

Pr. 121 Number of PU communication
retries

Pr. 122 PU communication check time interval

Pr. 123 PU communication waiting time setting

Pr. 124 PU communication CR/LF selection

Pr. 342 Communication EEPROM write selection

Pr. 343 Communication error count

Pr. 502 Stop mode selection at communication error

Pr. 549 Protocol selection

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

117

0 to 31

(0 to 247)



Specify the inverter station number.
Set the inverter station numbers when two or 
more inverters are connected to one personal 
computer.

118

48, 96, 

192, 384

Set the communication speed.
The setting value 

 100 equals the 

communication speed.
For example, the communication speed is 
19200bps when the setting value is 192.

119

Stop bit length

Data length

0

1bit

8bit

1 (initial 

value)

2bit

10

1bit

7bit

11

2bit

120

0

Without parity check

1

With odd parity check

2 (initial 

value)

With even parity check

121

0 to 10

Set the permissible number of retries at 
occurrence of a data receive error. If the number 
of consecutive errors exceeds the permissible 
value, the inverter trips.

9999

If a communication error occurs, the inverter will 
not come to trip.

122

0 (initial 

value)

RS-485 communication can be made
Note that a communication error (E.PUE) occurs 
as soon as the inverter is switched to the 
operation mode with control source.

0.1 to 

999.8s

Sets the interval of communication check time.
If a no-communication state persists for longer 
than the permissible time, the inverter trips.

9999

No communication check

123

0 to 

150ms

Set the waiting time between data transmission 
to the inverter and response.

9999 

(initial 

value)

Set with communication data.

124

0

Without CR/LF

1 (initial 

value)

With CR

2

With CR/LF

117 to 124, 342, 343, 502, 549

Pr.

502

At alarm 
occurrence

Indication

Error
output

At error
removal

0 (initial 

value)

3

Coasts to 
stop.

E.PUE

Output

Stop
(E.PUE)

1

Decelerates 
to stop

After stop
E.PUE

Output
after stop

Stop
(E.PUE)

2

Decelerates 
to stop

After stop
E.PUE

Without
output

Automatic
restart
functions

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

343

Displays the number of communication 
errors during MODBUS RTU 
communication. (Reading only)

549

0 (initial 

value)

Mitsubishi inverter (computer link 
operation) protocol

1

MODBUS RTU protocol

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

61

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

You can set the magnitude (slope) of the output frequency as desired
in relation to the frequency setting signal (0 to 5VDC, 0 to 10V or 4 to
20mA).
C22 (Pr. 922) to C25 (Pr. 923) is available when the operation panel
(PA02) for the FR-E500 series is connected with cable. You can
calibrate the operation panel built-in potentiometer.

(1) Change the frequency at maximum analog input

(Pr. 125, Pr. 126)

Set Pr. 125 (Pr. 126) when changing only frequency setting
(gain) of the maximum analog input voltage (current). (Other
settings need not be changed.)

(2) Analog input bias/gain calibration

(C2 (Pr. 902) to C7 (Pr. 905))

The "bias" and "gain" functions are designed to adjust the
relationships between the output frequency and the setting
input signal, e.g. 0 to 5VDC/0 to 10VDC or 4 to 20mADC
entered from outside the inverter.

(3) Analog input display unit changing (Pr. 241)

You can change the analog input display unit (%/V/mA) for
analog input bias/gain calibration.

The inverter can be used to exercise process control, e.g. flow rate,
air volume or pressure.
The terminal 2 input signal or parameter setting is used as a set
point and the terminal 4 input signal used as a feedback value to
constitute a feedback system for PID control.

 Pr. 128 = "20, 21" (measured value input)

Performs PID control by feedbacking the position signal of the
dancer roller, controlling the dancer roller is in the specified position.
Performs dancer control by setting 40 to 43 in Pr. 128 PID action
selection
. The main speed command is the speed command of each
operation mode (external, PU, communication). Performs PID
control by the position detection signal of the dancer roller, then the
result is added to the main speed command.

You can switch the display language of the PU (FR-PU07) to
another.

When connecting the operation panel (PA02) of the FR-E500
series with a cable, use Pr. 146 Built-in potentiometer switching for
selecting the operation using the built-in frequency setting
potentiometer, or using [UP/DOWN] key.

Analog input frequency change and 
adjustment (calibration)

Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency

Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency

Pr. 241 Analog input display unit switchover

C2 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias frequency

C3 (Pr. 902) Terminal 2 frequency setting bias 

C4 (Pr. 903) Terminal 2 frequency setting gain

C5(Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias frequency

C6 (Pr. 904) Terminal 4 frequency setting bias 

C7 (Pr. 905) Terminal 4 frequency setting gain

C22 (Pr. 922) Frequency setting
voltage bias frequency (built-in
potentiometer)

C23 (Pr. 922) Frequency setting 
voltage bias (built-in potentiometer)

C24 (Pr. 923) Frequency setting voltage 
gain frequency (built-in potentiometer)

C25 (Pr. 923) Frequency setting 
voltage gain (built-in potentiometer)

125, 126, 241, C2 (902) to C7 (905), C22 (922) to C25 (923)

Pr.

C2 (Pr. 902)

C3 (Pr. 902)

C4 (Pr. 903)

60Hz

Output frequency (Hz)

0

0

Frequency setting signal

100%

10V

Initial value

Bias

0

5V

Pr. 125

Gain

C5 (Pr. 904)

C6 (Pr. 904)

C7 (Pr. 905)

60Hz

Pr. 126

0

Frequency setting 

signal

100%

Initial value

Bias

Gain

0

20

4

20mA

Output frequency (Hz)

PID control, dancer control

Pr. 127 PID control automatic switchover frequency

Pr. 128 PID action selection

Pr. 129 PID proportional band

Pr. 130 PID integral time

Pr. 131 PID upper limit

Pr. 132 PID lower limit

Pr. 133 PID action set point

Pr. 134 PID differential time

PU display language selection

Pr. 145 PU display language selection

Pr. 145 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Japanese

1

English

2

German

3

French

4

Spanish

5

Italian

6

Swedish

7

Finnish

Built-in potentiometer switching

Pr. 146 Built-in potentiometer switching

Pr. 146 Setting

Description

0

Built-in frequency setting potentiometer gain

1 (initial value)

Digital frequency setting by the [UP/DOWN] key.

9999

Frequency setting with the built-in frequency setting 
potentiometer is available when the frequency set by 
[UP/DOWN] key is "0Hz".

147

Refer to the section about Pr. 7.

127 to 134

Pr.

+-

IM

PID operation 

Pr. 133 
or terminal 2

Set point

Inverter circuit

Motor

Feedback signal (measured value)

Terminal 4

Kp: Proportionality constant   Ti: Integral time   S: Operator   Td: Differential time

Manipulated 
variable

0 to 5VDC 
(0 to 10VDC)

4 to 20mADC (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V)

Ti

S

Kp   1+            +Td    S

1

145

Pr.

146

Pr.

Pr.


background image

62

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

The output power during inverter running can be detected and
output to the output terminal.

(1) Output current detection

(Y12 signal, Pr. 150, Pr. 151)

The output current detection function can be used for
excessive torque detection, etc.

If the output current remains at the Pr.150 setting or higher
during inverter operation for the time set in Pr.151 or
longer, the output current detection (Y12) signal is output
from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.

(2) Zero current detection (Y13 signal, Pr. 152, Pr. 153)

If the output current remains at the Pr.152 setting or lower
during inverter operation for the time set in Pr.153 or
longer, the output current detection (Y12) signal is output
from the inverter's open collector or relay output terminal.

Parameter which can be read from the operation panel and PU (FR-
PU07) can be restricted.
The inverter is set to display all parameters with initial setting.

User group function (Pr. 160, Pr. 172 to Pr. 174)

The user group function is designed to display only the
parameters necessary for setting.

From among all parameters, a maximum of 16 parameters can
be registered in the user group. When "1" is set in Pr. 160 , only
parameters registered in the user group can be accessed for
reading and writing. (The parameters not registered in the user
group cannot be read.)

Set parameter numbers in Pr. 173 to register parameters in
the user group.

To delete a parameter from the user group, set its parameter
number in Pr. 174. To batch-delete the registered parameters,
set Pr. 172 to "9999".

The setting dial of the operation panel can be used for setting

like a potentiometer.

The key operation of the operation panel can be disabled.

When setting the set frequency with the setting dial, the

frequency setting increments of the setting dial can be changed,
in proportion as the rotated amount of the setting dial (speed).

Detection of output current (Y12 signal) 
Detection of zero current (Y13 signal)

Pr. 150 Output current detection level

Pr. 151 Output current detection signal delay time

Pr. 152 Zero current detection level

Pr. 153 Zero current detection time

154, 156, 157

Refer to the section about Pr. 22.

150 to 153

Pr.

Time

Pr. 150

OFF

ON

OFF

Output current

detection signal

(Y12)

100ms

Output current

Pr. 151

OFF

ON

Start signal

Time

Output current

OFF

ON

Zero current 

detection time 

(Y13)

Pr. 153 
Detection time

Pr. 153 
Detection time

Pr. 152

OFF

ON

0[A]

100ms

Pr. 152

Pr.

User group function

Pr. 160 User group read selection

Pr. 172 User group registered display/batch clear

Pr. 173 User group registration

Pr. 174 User group clear

Pr. 160

Setting

Description

0

(initial 

value)

All parameters are displayed.

1

Only the parameters registered in the user group can be displayed.

9999

Only the simple mode parameters can be displayed.

Operation selection of the operation 
panel

Pr. 161 Frequency setting/key lock operation
selection

Pr. 295 Magnitude of frequency change setting

Pr. 161 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Setting dial frequency setting mode

Key lock invalid

1

Setting dial potentiometer mode

10

Setting dial frequency setting mode

Key lock valid

11

Setting dial potentiometer mode

162, 165

Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

168, 169

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

170, 171

Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

172 to 174

Refer to the section about Pr. 160.

160, 172 to 174

Pr.

161, 295

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.
Pr.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

63

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Use these parameters to select/change the input terminal
functions.

 When Pr. 59 Remote function selection  "0", the functions of the RL, RM

and RH signals change as listed above.

 When Pr. 270 = "1", the functions of the RL and RT signals change as

listed above.

 The OH signal turns on when the relay contact "opens".

 For the safety stop function model, the setting in Pr. 183 MRS terminal

function selection is valid only during the communication operation.

 The setting is not available for the CC-Link communication model.

You can change the functions of the open collector output terminal
and relay output terminal.

 The setting is available for the safety stop function model (with the FR-

E7DS) and CC-Link communication model.

 The setting is available for the safety stop function model and CC-Link

communication model.

Function assignment of input terminal

Pr. 178 STF terminal function selection Pr. 179 STR terminal function selection
Pr. 180 RL terminal function selection

Pr. 181 RM terminal function selection

Pr. 182 RH terminal function selection

Pr. 183 MRS terminal function selection

Pr. 184 RES terminal function selection

Pr. 178 to 

Pr. 184

Setting



Signal

Functions

0

RL

Pr. 59 = 0 (initial 
value)

Low-speed operation 
command

Pr. 59 

 0 



Remote setting (setting 
clear)

Pr. 270 = 1 



Stop-on contact selection 
0

1

RM

Pr. 59 = 0 (initial 
value)

Middle-speed operation 
command

Pr. 59 

 0 



Remote setting 
(deceleration)

2

RH

Pr. 59 = 0 (initial 
value)

High-speed operation 
command

Pr. 59 

 0 



Remote setting 
(acceleration)

3

RT

Second function selection
Pr. 270 = 1 



Stop-on contact selection 1

4

AU

Terminal 4 input selection 



5

JOG

Jog operation selection 



7

OH

External thermal relay inpu



8

REX

15-speed selection 
(combination with three speeds RL, RM, RH)

10

X10

Inverter operation enable signal 
(FR-HC2/FR-CV connection) 



12

X12

PU operation external interlock 



14

X14

PID control valid terminal

15

BRI

Brake opening completion signal

16

X16

PU-external operation switchover 



18

X18

V/F switchover 
(V/F control is exercised when X18 is ON)

24

MRS

Output stop 

25

STOP

Start self-holding selection 



60

STF

Forward rotation command 
(assigned to STF terminal (Pr. 178) only) 



61

STR

Reverse rotation command 
(assigned to STR terminal (Pr. 179) only



62

RES

Inverter reset 



65

X65

PU/NET operation switchover 



66

X66

External/NET operation switchover 



67

X67

Command source switchover 



9999

No function

178 to 184

Pr.

Terminal assignment of output terminal

Pr. 190 RUN terminal function selection

Pr. 191 FU terminal function selection

Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal function selection

Pr. 190 to Pr. 192

Setting

Signal

Functions

Positive 

logic

Negative 

logic

0

100

RUN

Inverter running

1

101

SU

Up to frequency

3

103

OL

Overload alarm

4

104

FU

Output frequency detection

7

107

RBP

Regenerative brake pre-alarm

8

108

THP

Electronic thermal O/L relay pre-alarm

11

111

RY

Inverter operation ready

12

112

Y12

Output current detection

13

113

Y13

Zero current detection

14

114

FDN

PID lower limit

15

115

FUP

PID upper limit

16

116

RL

PID forward/reverse rotation output

20

120

BOF

Brake opening request

25

125

FAN

Fan fault output

26

126

FIN

Heatsink overheat pre-alarm

46

146

Y46

During deceleration due to instantaneous 
power failure (retained until release)

47

147

PID

During PID control activated

64

164

Y64

During retry

68

168

EV

24V external power supply operation

 



80

180

SAFE

Safety monitor output

 



81

181

SAFE2

Safety monitor output 2

 



90

190

Y90

Life alarm

91

191

Y91

Fault output 3 (power-off signal)

93

193

Y93

Current average value monitor signal

95

195

Y95

Maintenance timer signal

96

196

REM

Remote output

98

198

LF

Alarm output

99

199

ALM

Fault output

9999

No function

232 to 239

Refer to the section about Pr. 4.

240

Refer to the section about Pr. 72.

241

Refer to the section about Pr. 125.

190 to 192

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.


background image

64

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

You can control the operation of the cooling fan (FR-E720-1.5K or
higher, FR-E740-1.5K or higher, FR-E720S-0.75K or higher) built
in the inverter.

The inverter output current may be used to assume motor slip to
keep the motor speed constant.

You can choose whether to make earth (ground) fault detection at
start valid or invalid. Earth (ground) fault detection is executed only
right after the start signal is input to the inverter.

 As detection is executed at start, output is delayed for approx. 20ms every

start.

If an earth (ground) fault is detected with "1" set in Pr. 249, fault
output (E.GF) is displayed and the output is shut off.

Protective function will not activate if an earth (ground) fault occurs
during operation.

If the motor capacity is smaller than the inverter capacity for the 5.5K
or higher, earth (ground) fault detection may not be provided.

Used to select the stopping method (deceleration to a stop or
coasting) when the start signal turns off.
Used to stop the motor with a mechanical brake, etc. together with
switching off of the start signal.
You can also select the operations of the start signals (STF/STR).

When "9999 (initial value) or 8888" is set in Pr. 250   

When a value other than "9999" (initial value) or "8888" is set in Pr. 250 

You can disable the output phase failure protection function that
stops the inverter output if one of the inverter output side (load
side) three phases (U, V, W) opens. Input phase failure protection,
which stops inverter output when one of three phases (R, S, T) on
the inverter's input side is lost, can be disabled.

 The setting is available for three-phase power input models. 

Increase cooling fan life

Pr. 244 Cooling fan operation selection

Pr. 244 Setting

Description

0

Operates in power-on status.
Cooling fan on/off control invalid 
(the cooling fan is always on at power on)

1

(initial value)

Cooling fan on/off control valid
The fan is always on while the inverter is running. 
During a stop, the inverter status is monitored and 
the fan switches on-off according to the temperature.

Slip compensation 

Pr. 245 Rated slip

Pr. 246 Slip compensation time constant

Pr. 247 Constant-power range slip
compensation selection

Earth (ground) fault detection at start 

Pr. 249 Earth (ground) fault detection at start

Pr. 249 Setting

Description

0 (initial value)

Without earth (ground) fault detection

1

With earth (ground) fault detection

*

244

Pr.

245 to 247

Pr.

V/F

V/F

V/F

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

249

Pr.

Selection of motor stopping method and
start signal

Pr. 250 Stop selection

Pr. 250 

Setting

Description

Start signal 

(STF/STR)

Stop operation

0 to 100s

STF signal: 
Forward rotation start
STR signal: 
Reverse rotation start

The motor is coasted to a 
stop when the preset time 
elapses after the start signal 
is turned off.

1000s to 1100s

STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: 
Forward/reverse signal

The motor is coasted to a 
stop (

Pr. 250

 - 1000)s after 

the start signal is turned off.

9999

STF signal: 
Forward rotation start
STR signal: 
Reverse rotation start

When the start signal is 
turned off, the motor 
decelerates to stop.

8888

STF signal: Start signal
STR signal: 
Forward/reverse signal

Input/output phase failure protection 
selection

Pr. 251 Output phase loss protection selection

Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection

Pr.

Number

Setting Range

Description

251

0

Without output phase failure protection

1 (initial value)

With output phase failure protection

872 *

0

Without input phase failure protection

1 (initial value)

With input phase failure protection

250

Pr.

Time

ON

OFF

Start signal

Deceleration starts 
when start signal turns OFF

Deceleration time 
(Time set in 

Pr. 8, etc.)

DC brake

Output 

frequency

(Hz)

ON

OFF

RUN signal

OFF

ON

Start signal

The motor coasts to stop

Time

OFF

RUN signal

Output 

frequency

(Hz)

ON

Output is shut off when set 
time elapses after start 
signal turned OFF 
Pr. 250

251, 872

Pr.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

65

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Degrees of deterioration of main circuit capacitor, control circuit
capacitor or inrush current limit circuit and cooling fan can be
diagnosed by monitor. When any part has approached the end of
its life, an alarm can be output by self diagnosis to prevent a fault.
(Use the life check of this function as a guideline since the life
except the main circuit capacitor is calculated theoretically.)

When a power failure or undervoltage occurs, the inverter can be
decelerated to a stop or can be decelerated and re-accelerated to
the set frequency.

(1) Power failure stop function (Pr. 261 = "1")

If power is restored during power failure deceleration,
deceleration to a stop is continued and the inverter
remains stopped. To restart, turn the start signal off, then
turn it on again.

(2) Original operation continuation at instantaneous

power failure function (Pr. 261 = "2")

When power is restored during deceleration after a power
failure, acceleration is made again up to the set frequency.

Display of the life of the inverter parts

Pr. 255 Life alarm status display

Pr. 256 Inrush current limit circuit life display

Pr. 257 Control circuit capacitor life display

Pr. 258 Main circuit capacitor life display

Pr. 259 Main circuit capacitor life measuring

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

255

(0 to 15)

Displays whether the control circuit capacitor, 
main circuit capacitor, cooling fan, and each 
parts of the inrush current limit circuit has 
reached the life alarm output level or not.
(Reading only)

256

(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the inrush 
current limit circuit. 
(Reading only)

257

(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the 
control circuit capacitor.
(Reading only)

258

(0 to 100%)

Displays the deterioration degree of the main 
circuit capacitor.
(Reading only)
The value measured by Pr. 259 is displayed.

259

0, 1

Setting "1" and turning the power supply off 
starts the measurement of the main circuit 
capacitor life.
When the Pr. 259 value is "3" after power-ON 
again, the measuring is completed.
Displays the deterioration degree in Pr. 258.

255 to 259

Pr.

Operation at instantaneous power 
failure

Pr. 261 Power failure stop selection

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

261

0 (initial 

value)

Coasts to stop.
When undervoltage or power failure occurs, 
the inverter output is shut off.

1

When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, 
the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.

2

When undervoltage or a power failure occurs, 
the inverter can be decelerated to a stop.
If power is restored during a power failure, the 
inverter accelerates again.

267

Refer to the section about Pr. 73.

268

Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

269

Parameter for manufacturer setting. Do not set.

261

Pr.

During deceleration 

at occurrence of power failure

During stop 

at occurrence 

of power failure

STF

Y46

Time

Turn OFF STF once to make acceleration again

Power

Output frequency

Pr. 261 = 1

ON

Y46

During deceleration at 

occurrence of power failure

Reacceleration

Time

When power is restored during deceleration 

at occurrence of power failure

Output 

frequency

IPF

Power

Pr. 261 = 2

ON

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.


background image

66

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

To ensure accurate positioning at the upper limit etc. of a lift, stop-
on-contact control causes a mechanical brake to be closed while
the motor is developing a holding torque to keep the load in contact
with a mechanical stopper etc.
This function suppresses vibration which is liable to occur when the
load is stopped upon contact in vertical motion applications,
ensuring steady precise positioning.

This function is used to output from the inverter the mechanical
brake operation timing signal in vertical lift and other applications.
This function prevents the load from dropping with gravity at a start
due to the operation timing error of the mechanical brake or an
overcurrent alarm from occurring at a stop, ensuring secure operation.

<Operation example>

At start: When the start signal is input to the inverter, the inverter

starts running. When the internal speed command reaches
the value set in Pr. 278 and the output current is not less
than the value set in Pr. 279, the inverter outputs the brake
opening request signal (BOF) after the time set in Pr. 280
has elapsed.
When the time set in Pr. 281 elapses after the brake opening
completion signal (BRI) was activated*, the inverter
increases the output frequency to the set speed.

At stop: When the speed has decreased to the frequency set in Pr.

282, the brake opening request signal (BOF) is turned off.
When the time set in Pr. 283 elapses after the brake
operation confirmation signal (BRI) was activated*, the
inverter output is switched off.

* If Pr. 292 = "8" (mechanical brake opening completion signal not input),

this time is the time after the brake opening request signal is output.

1) Pr. 292 = "7" (brake opening completion signal input)

2) Pr. 292 = "8" (brake opening completion signal not input)

Stop-on-contact control 

Pr. 270 Stop-on contact control selection

Pr. 275 Stop-on contact excitation
current low-speed multiplying factor

Pr. 276 PWM carrier frequency at stop-on contact

Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)

Pr. 48 Second stall prevention operation current

Pr. 270 Setting

Description

0

(initial value)

Without stop-on-contact control

1

Stop-on-contact control

Select advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-purpose
magnetic flux vector control.
When both the RT and RL signals are switched on, the inverter
enters the stop-on contact mode, in which operation is performed at
the frequency set in Pr. 6 Multi-speed setting (low speed)
independently of the preceding speed.

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

6

0 to 

400Hz

Sets the output frequency for stop-on-contact 
control
The frequency should be as low as possible 
(about 2Hz). If it is set to more than 30Hz, the 
operating frequency will be 30Hz.

48

0 to 

200%

Sets the stall prevention operation level for stall 
prevention operation level.
(Pr. 22 when Pr. 48 = "9999")

275

0 to 

300%

Usually set a value between 130% and 180%.
Set the force (holding torque) for stop-on-contact 
control.

9999

Without compensation.

276

0 to 9

Sets a PWM carrier frequency for stop-on-
contact control.

9999

As set in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection.

270, 275, 276, 6, 48

Pr.

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

(a)

(b)

(c)

Time

Pr. 4

RH

RM
RL

RT

Pr. 5

Pr. 6

Output 

frequency

0

Normal mode Stop-on-contact control mode

(a) Acceleration time (Pr. 7 ) (b) Deceleration time (Pr. 8 )

(c) Second deceleration time (Pr. 44/Pr. 45 )

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

∗ Goes into stop-on-contact control when both RL and RT switch ON. 

RL and RT may be switched on in any  order with any time difference.

Brake sequence function 

Pr. 278 Brake opening frequency

Pr. 279 Brake opening current

Pr. 280 Brake opening current detection time

Pr. 281 Brake operation time at start

Pr. 282 Brake operation frequency

Pr. 283 Brake operation time at stop

Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration

278 to 283, 292

Pr.

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

GP MFVC

STF

ON

Output current

Brake opening request

(BOF signal)

ON

Electromagnetic brake operation

Opened

Closed

Closed

Time

Brake opening completion 

(BRI signal)

ON

Pr. 278

Pr. 282

Target 

frequency

Pr. 13

Pr.13 setting 
or 0.5Hz, 
whichever is lower

Pr. 280

Pr. 281

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 279

Pr. 283

STF

ON

Output current

Brake opening request

(BOF signal)

ON

Electromagnetic brake operation

Opened

Closed

Closed

Time

Pr. 278

Pr. 282

Target 

frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 281

Pr. 280

Pr. 279

Pr. 13

Pr. 283

Pr.13 setting 
or 0.5Hz, 
whichever is lower


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

67

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

This function is designed to balance the load in proportion to the
load torque to provide the speed drooping characteristic.
This function is effective for balancing the load when using
multiple inverters

Droop control
This control is valid when a value other than "0" is set in Pr. 286
under advanced magnetic flux vector control.
The maximum droop compensation frequency is 120Hz.

Registering 4-digit password can restrict parameter reading/
writing.

Level of reading/writing restriction by PU/NET mode operation

command can be selected by Pr. 296.

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

278

0 to 30Hz

Set to the rated slip frequency of the motor + 
about 1.0Hz.
This parameter may be set only if Pr. 278 

 Pr. 282.

279

0 to 200%

Generally, set this parameter to about 50 to 
90%. If the setting is too low, the load is liable 
to drop due to gravity at start.
Suppose that the inverter rated current is 
100%.

280

0 to 2s

Generally, set this parameter to about 0.1 to 
0.3s.

281

0 to 5s

Pr. 292 = 7: Set the mechanical delay time until 
the brake is loosened.
Pr. 292 = 8: Set the mechanical delay time until 
the brake is loosened + about 0.1 to 0.2s.

282

0 to 30Hz

At this frequency, the brake opening request 
signal (BOF) is switched off. Generally, set this 
parameter to the Pr. 278 setting + 3 to 4Hz.
This parameter may be only set if Pr. 282 

 Pr. 278.

283

0 to 5s

Pr. 292 =7: Set the mechanical delay time until 
the brake is closed + 0.1s.
Pr. 292 =8: Set the mechanical delay time until 
the brake is closed + 0.2 to 0.3s.

292

0, 1, 7, 8, 

11

Brake sequence function is made valid when a 
setting is "7" or "8".

Droop control 

Pr. 286 Droop gain

Pr. 287 Droop filter time constant

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

286

0

(initial value)

Droop control is invalid

0.1 to 100%

Set the drooping amount at the rated torque 
as a percentage with respect to the rated 
motor frequency.

287

0.00 to 

1.00s

Set the time constant of the filter applied on 
the torque amount current.

292, 293

Refer to the section about Pr. 61.

295

Refer to the section about Pr. 161.

286, 287

Pr.

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

AD MFVC

Droop compensation 

frequency

Torque

100%

Droop
gain

-100%

Frequency command

0

Rated frequency

Pr.
Pr.

Password function

Pr. 296 Password lock level

Pr. 297 Password lock/unlock

Pr. 296 

Setting

PU Mode 

Operation 

Command

NET Mode Operation Command

RS-485 

Communication

Communication 

Option

Read

Write

Read

Write

Read

Write

9999

0, 100

1, 101

2, 102

3, 103

4, 104

5, 105

6, 106

99, 199

Only parameters registered in the user group can be read/written

(For the parameters not registered in the user group, same 

restriction level as "4, 104" applies.)

: enabled, 

: restricted

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

29



1000 to 9998 Register a 4-digit password

(0 to 5) 



Displays password unlock error count. 
(Reading only) 
(Valid when Pr. 296 = "100" to "106")

9999

(initial value)

No password lock

 If the password has been forgotten, perform all parameter clear to

unlock the parameter restriction. In that case, other parameters are also
cleared.

 "0 or 9999" can be entered in Pr. 297, but the Pr. 297 setting is not

overwritten.

298

Refer to the section about Pr. 82.

299

Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

296, 297

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.


background image

68

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

When the RS-485 communication with the PU connector or
communication option is used, the external start command and
frequency command can be made valid. Command source in the
PU operation mode can be selected.

 This parameter allows its setting to be changed in any operation mode

even if "0 (initial value) or 1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write selection.

You can utilize the on/off of the inverter's output signals instead of
the remote output terminal of the programmable controller.

 The above parameters allow its setting to be changed during operation in

any operation mode even if "0" (initial value) is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write
selection
.

<Remote output data>

When the cumulative energization time of the inverter reaches the
parameter set time, the maintenance timer output signal (Y95) is
output. 

(MT) is displayed on the operation panel.

This can be used as a guideline for the maintenance time of
peripheral devices.

The cumulative energization time of the inverter is stored into the
EEPROM every hour and indicated in Pr. 503 Maintenance timer in
100h increments. Pr. 503  is clamped at 9998 (999800h).

Start command source and frequency 
command source during communication 
operation

Pr. 338 Communication operation command source

Pr. 339 Communication speed command source

Pr. 550 NET mode operation command source selection

Pr. 551 PU mode operation command source selection

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

338

0

(initial 

value)

Start command source communication

1

Start command source external

339

0

(initial 

value)

Frequency command source communication

1

Frequency command source external

2

Frequency command source external ($$When 

there is no external input, the frequency 

command via communication is valid, and the 

frequency command from terminal 2 is invalid.)

550

0

The communication option is the command 

source in the NET operation mode.

2

PU connector is the command source in the 

NET operation mode.

9999

(initial 

value)

Automatic communication option recognition

Normally, PU connector is valid. When a 

communication option is mounted, the 

communication option is valid. 

551

2

PU connector is the command source in the PU 

operation mode.

3

USB connector is the command source in the 

PU operation mode.

4

Operation panel is the command source in the 

PU operation mode.

9999

(initial 

value)

USB automatic recognition

Normally, operation panel is the command 

source. When the PU (FR-PU07) is connected 

to the PU connector, PU is the command 

source. When USB is connected, USB is the 

command source.

340

Refer to the section about Pr. 79.

342, 343

Refer to the section about Pr. 117.

450

Refer to the section about Pr. 71.

338, 339, 550, 551

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.

Remote output function (REM signal)

Pr. 495 Remote output selection

Pr. 496 Remote output data 1

Pr. 497 Remote output data 2

Pr.

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

495

0

(initial value)

Remote output data 

clear at powering off

Remote output data 

is cleared during an 

inverter reset

1

Remote output data 

held at powering off

10

Remote output data 

clear at powering off

Remote output data 

is retained during an 

inverter reset

11

Remote output data 

held at powering off

496

0 to 4095

Refer to the following diagram.

497

0 to 4095

Pr. 496

b11

b0













ABC 



FU
 







RUN

Pr. 497

b11

b0





RA3

 

RA2

 

RA1

 

Y6
 

Y5
 

Y4
 

Y3
 

Y2
 

Y1
 

Y0
 

 Optional (always 0 when read)

 Y0 to Y6 are available only when the extension output option (FR-

A7AY E kit) is fitted

 RA1 to RA3 are available only when the relay output option (FR-A7AR

E kit) is fitted

 Optional for the CC-Link communication model (always "0" when read)

502

Refer to the section about Pr. 117.

Maintenance of parts

Pr. 503 Maintenance timer

Pr. 504 Maintenance timer alarm output set time

495 to 497

Pr.

Pr.

503, 504

Pr.

First power

Time

ON

Maintenance
timer
(

Pr. 503)

Set "0" in 

Pr. 503

Y95 signal 

MT display

OFF

ON

ON

Pr. 504

9998

(999800h)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

69

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

Inverter setup with setup software (FR Configurator) can be easily
performed by USB communication.
(FR Configurator supports the standard control circuit terminal
model only.) 

The average value of the output current during constant speed
operation and the maintenance timer value are output as a pulse
to the current average value monitor signal (Y93).
The pulse width output to the I/O module of the programmable
controller or the like can be used as a guideline due to abrasion of
machines and elongation of belt and for aged deterioration of
devices to know the maintenance time.
The current average value monitor signal (Y93) is output as pulse
for 20s as 1 cycle and repeatedly output during constant speed
operation.

Mechanical vibration produced while motor is driving (resonance)
can be reduced. Set 100% in Pr. 653 and check if the vibration will
be reduced. Make adjustment gradually increasing the setting,
until the vibration become the smallest.

This function detects a regeneration status and increases the
frequency to avoid the regenerative status.

Possible to avoid regeneration by automatically increasing the
frequency and continue operation if the fan happens to rotate faster
than the set speed due to the effect of another fan in the same duct.

 For single-phase 100V power input model, "power input voltage  2 

".

Parameters you can use for your own purposes.
You can input any number within the setting range 0 to 9999.
For example, the number can be used:

As a unit number when multiple units are used.

As a pattern number for each operation application when

multiple units are used.

As the year and month of introduction or inspection.

Inverter setup using USB communication

Pr. 547 USB communication station number

Pr. 548 USB communication check time interval

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

547

0

(initial value)

Set the station number of USB device 
(inverter) within the range "0 to 31".

1 to 31

548

0 to 999.8

Set the communication check time interval of 
USB communication.
If data is not received within the time set in 

Pr. 548, (E.USB) 

is 

displayed.

9999

(initial value)

Communication time interval is not checked.

549

Refer to the section about Pr. 117.

550, 551

Refer to the section about Pr. 338.

Current average value monitor signal

Pr. 555 Current average time

Pr. 556 Data output mask time

Pr. 557 Current average value monitor signal
output reference current

563, 564

Refer to the section about Pr. 52.

571

Refer to the section about Pr. 13.

611

Refer to the section about Pr. 57.

Reduce mechanical resonance

Pr. 653 Speed smoothing control

547, 548

Pr.

Pr.
Pr.

555 to 557

Pr.

Output current average value (A)

1) Data output mask time

When the speed has changed to 

constant from acceleration/deceleration, 

Y93 signal is not output for Pr. 556 time.

2) Start pulse

Output as Hi pulse shape for 1s (fixed)

The output currents are averaged during 

the time period set in Pr. 555.

3) Output current average value pulse

The averaged current value is output for 0.5 to 9s 

(10 to 180%) during start pulse output.

Signal output time = 

Pr. 557 (A)

4) Maintenance timer pulse

The maintenance timer value (Pr. 503) is 

output as Hi pulse shape for 2 to 9s 

(16000h to 72000h)

Signal output time =

40000h

5) End pulse

Output as low pulse 

shape for 1 to 16.5s

Time

Y93 signal

1 cycle (20s)

Next cycle

Output frequency

From acceleration to constant speed operation

Pr. 503   100h    5s

   5s

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.

653

Pr.

Regeneration avoidance function

Pr. 665 Regeneration avoidance frequency gain

Pr. 882 Regeneration avoidance operation selection

Pr. 883 Regeneration avoidance operation level

Pr. 885 Regeneration avoidance 
compensation frequency limit value

Pr. 886 Regeneration avoidance voltage gain

Pr. 

Number

Setting 

Range

Description

882

0 (initial 

value)

Regeneration avoidance function invalid

1

Regeneration avoidance function is always valid

2

Regeneration avoidance function is valid only 
during a constant speed operation

883

300 to 

800V

Set the bus voltage level at which regeneration 
avoidance operates. When the bus voltage level 
is set to low, overvoltage error will be less apt to 
occur. However, the actual deceleration time 
increases. The set value must be higher than 
the "power supply voltage 

 " 

*.

885

0 to 10Hz

Set the limit value of frequency which rises at 
activation of regeneration avoidance function.

9999

Frequency limit invalid

886

0 to 

200%

Adjusts responsiveness at activation of 
regeneration avoidance. A larger setting will 
improve responsiveness to the bus voltage 
change. However, the output frequency could 
become unstable. When the load inertia of the 
motor is large, decrease the Pr. 886 setting.
When vibration is not suppressed by decreasing 
the Pr. 886 setting, set a smaller value in Pr. 665.

665

800

Refer to the section about Pr. 80.

859

Refer to the section about Pr. 82.

872

Refer to the section about Pr. 251.

Free parameter

Pr. 889 Free parameter 1

Pr. 889 Free parameter 2

665, 882, 883, 885, 886

Pr.

2

2

Bus voltage

(VDC)

Regeneration avoidance 

operation example for deceleration

Pr. 883

Output

frequency

(Hz)

Time

Time

During regeneration 

avoidance function operation

Pr.
Pr.
Pr.

888, 889

Pr.


background image

70

When setting parameters, refer to the instruction manual (Applied) and understand instructions.

By using the operation panel or PU (FR-PU07), you can calibrate
terminal FM to full scale deflection.

FM terminal calibration (C0 (Pr. 900))

The terminal FM is preset to output pulses. By setting the
calibration parameter C0 (Pr. 900), the meter connected to the
inverter can be calibrated by parameter setting without use of a
calibration resistor.

Using the pulse train output of the terminal FM, a digital display
can be provided by a digital counter. The monitor value is 1440
pulses/s output at the full-scale value of Pr. 54 FM terminal function
selection
.

 Not needed when the operation panel or PU (FR-PU07) is used for

calibration.
Use a calibration resistor when the indicator (frequency meter) needs to
be calibrated by a neighboring device because the indicator is located far
from the inverter.
However, the frequency meter needle may not deflect to full-scale if the
calibration resistor is connected. In this case, use this resistor and
operation panel or PU (FR-PU07) together.

You can make the buzzer "beep" when you press key of the
operation panel and parameter unit (FR-PU04/FR-PU07)

Contrast adjustment of the LCD of the parameter unit (FR-PU04/
FR-PU07) can be performed.
Decreasing the setting value makes contrast light.

Set "1" in Pr.CL parameter clear  to initialize all parameters.
(Calibration parameters are not cleared.)



Set "1" in ALLC  All parameter clear  to initialize all parameters.

Set "1" in Er.CL Fault history clear to clear fault history.

Using  Pr.CH Initial value change list, only the parameters changed
from the initial value can be displayed.

 Parameters are not cleared when "1" is set in Pr. 77 Parameter write

selection.

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump, set the parameters as follows.

(1) Load pattern selection (Pr. 14) 

Optimal output characteristics (V/F characteristics) can be
selected for application or load characteristics.

(2) Energy saving control (Pr. 60) 

Inverter will perform energy saving control automatically even
when the detailed parameter settings are made.
It is appropriate for an application such as a fan or pump.

Adjustment of terminal FM output 
(calibration)

C0 (Pr. 900)FM terminal calibration

C2(902) to C7(905), C22(922) to C25(923) 

 Refer to the section about Pr. 125.

C0(900)

Pr.

8VDC

T2

T1

Pulse width T1: Adjust using calibration parameter C0
Pulse cycle T2: Set with 

Pr. 55 (frequency monitor)

Set with 

Pr. 56 (current monitor)

(Digital indicator)

(-)

1440 pulses/s(+)

FM

SD

Indicator  
1mA full-scale
analog meter

(-)

(+)

1mA

FM

SD

Calibration  
resistor *1

Pr.

Buzzer control of the operation panel

Pr. 990 PU buzzer control

Pr. 990 Setting

Description

0

Without buzzer

1

(initial value)

With buzzer

PU contrast adjustment

Pr. 991 PU contrast adjustment

Pr. 991 Setting

Description

0 to 63

0: Light

63: Dark

Clear parameter, initial value change list

Pr.CL Parameter clear

ALLC All parameter clear

Er.CL Fault history clear

Pr.CH Initial value change list

990

Pr.

991

Pr.

CL, ALLC, Er.CL, CH

Pr.

To perform energy-saving operation for an application such as a fan or pump

Set "1" (for variable-torque load) in Pr.
14 Load pattern selection
.

The output voltage will change in
square curve against the output
frequency at the base frequency or
lower.
Set this parameter when driving a load
with load torque change proportionally
against the square of the rotation
speed, such as a fan or pump.

V/F

V/F

V/F

100%

Output voltage

Pr. 3 Base frequency

Output frequency (Hz)

Pr. 14 = 1

Set  Pr. 60 Energy saving control
selection
 = "9" (Optimum excitation
control mode).

The Optimum excitation control is
a control method to decide the
output voltage by controlling the
excitation current so the efficiency
of the motor is maximized.

The energy saving effect cannot
be expected when the motor
capacity is extremely smaller than
the inverter capacity, or when
multiple motors are connected to
one inverter.

V/F

V/F

V/F

0

20

20

40

40

60

60

80

80

100

100

Optimum excitation control

More energy saving

V/F control

Motor load torque (%)

[Comparison of Mitsubishi Electric products]

Motor efficiency (%)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

71

Protective Functions

When a fault occurs, the inverter output is shut off and the PU display automatically changes to any of the following fault or alarm indications.

 Resetting the inverter initializes the internal thermal integrated data of the

electronic thermal relay function.

 The error message shows an operational error. The inverter output is not shut off.

 Warnings are messages given before fault occur. The inverter output is not shut off.

 Alarms warn the operator of failures with output signals. The inverter output

is not shut off.

 When faults occur, the protective functions are activated to inverter trip and

output the fault signals.

 The external thermal operates only when the OH signal is set in Pr. 178 to Pr.

184 (input terminal function selection).

 This protective function does not function in the initial status.

 Protective function activates when Pr. 872 Input phase loss protection selection = "1".

 Available for only three-phase power input models.

This protective function does not function for the standard control circuit

terminal model or the built-in Ethernet communication function model.

This protective function is available for the safety stop function model (with the FR-

E7DS), FL remote communication model, and CC-Link communication model.

This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication

model, the CC-Link communication model, and the dedicated EtherCAT
communication model.

This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication

model and the dedicated EtherCAT communication model.

This protective function does not function for the FL remote communication model.

Function Name

Description

Display

Er

ror m

essage 

Operation panel lock

Appears when operation was tried during operation panel lock.

Password locked

Password function is active. Display and setting of parameter is restricted.

Parameter write error

Appears when an error occurred during parameter writing.

Inverter reset

Appears when the RES signal is on.

Wa

rn

in

g

s



Stall prevention (overcurrent)

Appears during overcurrent stall prevention.

Stall prevention (overvoltage)

Appears during overvoltage stall prevention. Appears while the regeneration avoidance function is activated.

Regenerative brake pre-alarm



Appears if the regenerative brake duty reaches or exceeds 85% of the Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty 

value. If the regenerative brake duty reaches 100%, a regenerative overvoltage (E. OV_) occurs.

Electronic thermal relay function pre-alarm Appears when the electronic thermal O/L relay has reached 85% of the specified value.

PU stop

Appears when 

 on the operation panel was pressed during external operation.

Maintenance signal output



Appears when the cumulative energization time has exceeded the maintenance output timer set value.

Undervoltage

Appears when the main circuit power became low voltage.

Safety stop 



Appears when safety stop function is activated (during output shutoff).

24V external power supply operation 

 Blinks when the main circuit power is not supplied and the 24V external power is being input.

Al

ar

m

s

 Fan alarm

Appears when the cooling fan remains stopped when operation is required or when the speed has 

decreased.

Fa

ul

t



Overcurrent trip during acceleration

Appears when an overcurrent occurred during acceleration.

Overcurrent trip during constant speed Appears when an overcurrent occurred during constant speed operation.
Overcurrent trip during deceleration or stop Appears when an overcurrent occurred during deceleration and at a stop.
Regenerative overvoltage trip during 

acceleration

Appears when an overvoltage occurred during acceleration.

Regenerative overvoltage trip during 

constant speed

Appears when an overvoltage occurred during constant speed operation.

Regenerative overvoltage trip during 

deceleration or stop

Appears when an overvoltage occurred during deceleration and at a stop.

Inverter overload trip

 

(electronic thermal O/L relay function) Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for inverter element protection was activated.
Motor overload trip

(electronic thermal O/L relay function)

 

 Appears when the electronic thermal relay function for motor protection was activated.

Heatsink overheat

Appears when the heatsink overheated.

Input phase loss



May appear when one phase voltage is lost or differs greatly from others in three-phases power supply.

Stall prevention stop

Appears when the output frequency drops to 1Hz as a result of deceleration due to the excess motor load.

Brake transistor alarm detection

This function stops the inverter output if an alarm occurs in the brake circuit, e.g. damaged brake 

transistors. In this case, the inverter must be powered off immediately.

Output side earth (ground) fault 

overcurrent at start



Appears when an earth (ground) fault occurred on the inverter's output side. (detects only at a start)

Output phase loss

If one of the three phases (U, V, W) on the inverter's output side (load side) is lost during inverter operation 

(except during DC injection brake operation and when output frequency is under 1Hz), inverter stops the output. 

External thermal relay operation

 Appears when the external thermal relay connected to the OH signal was activated.

Option fault

Appears when communication option is connected during password lock (Pr. 296 Password lock level = "0, 100").

Communication option fault

Appears when a communication error occurred in the communication option.

Option fault

Appears when a contact fault or the like of the connector between the inverter and communication option occurs.

Parameter storage device fault

Appears when operation of the element where parameters stored became abnormal. (control board)

Internal board fault

When a combination of control board and main circuit board is wrong, the inverter is tripped.

PU disconnection 



Appears when a communication error between the PU and inverter occurred, the communication 

interval exceeded the permissible time during the RS-485 communication with the PU connector, or 

communication errors exceeded the number of retries during the RS-485 communication.

Retry count excess



Appears when the operation was not restarted within the set number of retries.

CPU fault

Appears during the CPU and peripheral circuit errors occurred.

/

/

/

Inrush current limit circuit fault

Appears when the resistor of the inrush current limit circuit overheated.

Analog input fault 



Appears if voltage (current) is input to terminal 4 when the setting in Pr.267 Terminal 4 input selection 

and the setting of voltage/current input switch are different.

Brake sequence error



The inverter output is stopped when a sequence error occurs during use of the brake sequence 

function (Pr. 278 to Pr. 285).

USB communication fault 



Appears when USB communication error occurred.

Safety circuit fault 



Stop the inverter output when an internal circuit fault occurred.

Internal circuit fault

Appears when an internal circuit error occurred.

to

to


background image

72

Option and Peripheral Devices

By fitting the following options to the inverter, the inverter is provided with more functions. 

One type of plug-in option can be mounted.

Option list

Name

Model

Applications, Specifications, etc.

Applicable 

Inverter



Pl

ug-

in

 t

y

pe

16-bit digital input

FR-A7AX E kit

This input interface sets the high frequency accuracy of the inverter using an external BCD 
or binary digital signal.

BCD code 3 digits (maximum 999)

BCD code 4 digits (maximum 9999)

Binary 12 bits (maximum FFFH)

Binary 16 bits (maximum FFFFH)

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7A E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7AX *2

Safety stop 
function model

Digital output
Extension analog output

FR-A7AY E kit

This option provides the inverter with open collector outputs selected from among the 
standard output signals.

This option adds two different signals that can be monitored at the terminals AM0 and AM1, such 
as the output frequency, output voltage and output current.

20mADC or 10VDC meter can be connected.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7A E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7AY *2

Safety stop 
function model

Relay output

FR-A7AR E kit

This option provides the inverter with three different relay contact outputs selected from 
among the standard output signals.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7A E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7AR 



Safety stop 
function model

24VDC input

FR-E7DS

Connecting a 24V external power supply allows maintaining the I/O terminal function and 
the operation panel function (indication and key operation) even at power-OFF of inverter's 
main circuit power supply.

Safety stop 
function model

Co

m

m

u

nica

tio

n

CC-Link communication

FR-A7NC E kit

This option allows the inverter to be operated or monitored or the parameter setting to be 
changed from programmable controller, etc.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7NC E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7NC



Safety stop 
function model

L

ON

W

ORKS

 communication

FR-A7NL E kit

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7NL E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7NL



Safety stop 
function model

DeviceNet communication

FR-A7ND E kit

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7ND E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7ND



Safety stop 
function model

PROFIBUS-DP communication

FR-A7NP E kit

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model

FR-A7NP E kit 
cover SC and 
FR-A7NP



Safety stop 
function model

EtherCAT communication

E7NECT_2P



Dedicated 
EtherCAT 
communication 
model

Co

n

tro

te

rmi

n

a

l

RS-485 2-port terminal block

FR-E7TR

Multi-drop connection is easy with the 2 port terminal block adapted for EIA-485 (RS-485) 
communication terminal.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model
Ethernet 
communication 
function model


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

73

S

ta

n

d

-al

o

n

e sh

a

red

Parameter unit (8 languages) 

FR-PU07

Interactive parameter unit with LCD display

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model
Safety stop 
function model
Ethernet 
communication 
function model

Parameter unit with battery pack

FR-PU07BB

This parameter unit enables parameter setting without connecting the inverter to power 
supply.

Enclosure surface operation panel FR-PA07

This operation panel enables inverter operation and monitoring of frequency, etc. from the 
enclosure surface

Parameter unit connection cable

FR-CB20

Cable for connection of operation panel or parameter unit

 indicates a cable length. (1m, 3m, 5m)

USB cable

MR-J3USBCBL3M
Cable length 3m

Intercompatibility attachment

FR-E7AT01 to 03

For installation of a FR-E700 series inverter to the installation holes of FR-A024/A044 series 
inverter.

3.7K or lower. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

DIN rail attachment

FR-UDA01 to 03

Attachment for installation on DIN rail

3.7K or lower. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

Panel through attachment

FR-E7CN01 to 
06

Using this attachment dissipates about 70% of the inverter's heat by having the inverter
heatsink protrude from the back side of the enclosure.

All capacities. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

Totally enclosed structure
specification attachment
for the FR-E700 series

FR-E7CV01 to 
04

Installing the attachment to the inverter changes the protective structure of the inverter to the
totally enclosed structure (IP40 equivalent as specified by JEM1030).

7.5K or lower of the 
200V class of the 
standard control 
circuit terminal 
model. The option's 
model varies with 
the inverter's 
model.

AC reactor

FR-HAL

For harmonic current reduction and inverter input power factor improvement

All capacities. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

DC reactor

FR-HEL

EMC Directive compliant noise filter

SF, FR-E5NF, 
FR-S5NFSA

EMC Directive (EN61800-3 C3) compliant noise filter

All capacities. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

EMC compliant EMC filter 
installation attachment

FR-A5AT03

For installation of the inverter to the EMC Directive compliant EMC filter (SF).

11K of the 200V 
class

FR-AAT02

15K of the 200V 
class, and 11K and 
15K of the 400V 
class

FR-E5T(-02)

2.2K to 7.5K of the 
200V class. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

Radio noise filter

FR-BIF(H)

For radio noise reduction (connect to the input side)

All capacities.

Line noise filter

FR- BSF01, 
FR- BLF

For line noise reduction

Filterpack 

FR-BFP2

Combination of  power factor improving DC reactor, common mode choke, and capacitative 
filter

0.4K or higher of 
the three-phase 
power input model. 
The option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

Brake resistor

MRS type, MYS type

For increasing the regenerative braking capability (permissible duty 3%ED)

0.4K or higher. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

High-duty brake resistor 

FR-ABR

For increasing the regenerative braking capability (permissible duty 10%/6%ED)

Brake unit, Resistor unit, 
Discharging resistor

FR-BU2, FR-BR, 
GZG, GRZG type

For increasing the braking capability of the inverter (for high-inertia load or negative load)
Brake unit, electrical-discharge resistor and resistor unit are used in combination

Power regeneration common converter
Stand-alone reactor dedicated for the FR-CV

FR-CV
FR-CVL

Unit which can return motor-generated braking energy back to the power supply in common 
converter system

All capacities of the 
standard control 
circuit terminal 
model and safety 
stop function 
model. The option's 
model varies with 
the inverter's 
model.

High power factor converter

FR-HC2

The high power factor converter switches the converter section on/off to reshape an input 
current waveform into a sine wave, greatly suppressing harmonics. (Used in combination with 
the standard accessory.)

Surge voltage suppression filter

FR-ASF

Filter for suppressing surge voltage on motor

All capacities of the 
400V class. The 
option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

FR-BMF

5.5K or higher of 
the 400V class. 
The option's model 
varies with the 
inverter's model.

Name

Model

Applications, Specifications, etc.

Applicable 

Inverter



Connector for personal computer
A connector

Connector for amplifier
mini-B connector (5 pin)


background image

74

 The connectable inverter models or applicable capacities differ for each option. (To check the inverter lineup, refer to page 8.)

 Prepare both the dedicated E kit cover and the plug-in option unit.

 Manufactured by HMS Industrial Networks AB

 Rated power consumption. The power supply specifications of the FR series manual controllers and speed controllers are 200VAC 50Hz, 220V/220VAC 60Hz, and 115VAC 60Hz.

FR ser

ie

ma

nual

 

cont

rol

ler

/s

peed

 co

ntr

oll

er

Manual controller

FR-AX

For independent operation. With frequency meter, frequency potentiometer and start switch.

All capacities.

DC tach. follower

FR-AL

For synchronous operation (1VA) by external signal (0 to 5V, 0 to 10V DC)



Three speed selector

FR-AT

For three speed switching, among high, middle and low speed operation (1.5VA)



Motorized speed setter

FR-FK

For remote operation. Allows operation to be controlled from several places (5VA)



Ratio setter

FR-FH

For ratio operation. The ratios of five inverters can be set (3VA)



Speed detector

FR-FP

For tracking operation by a pilot generator (PG) signal (2VA)



Master controller

FR-FG

Master controller (5VA) for parallel operation of multiple (maximum 35) inverters.



Soft starter

FR-FC

For soft start and stop. Enables acceleration/deceleration in parallel operation (3VA)



Deviation detector

FR-FD

For continuous speed control operation. Used in combination with a deviation sensor or 
synchro (5VA)



Preamplifier

FR-FA

Used as an A/V converter or arithmetic amplifier (3VA)



Ot

he

rs

Pilot generator

QVAH-10

For tracking operation. 70V/35VAC 500Hz (at 2500r/min)

Deviation sensor

YVGC-500W-NS

For continuous speed control operation (mechanical deviation detection) Output 90VAC/90ºC

Frequency setting potentiometer

WA2W 1k

For frequency setting. Wire-wound 2W 1k

 type B characteristic

Analog frequency meter 
(64mm 

 60mm)

YM206NRI 1mA

Dedicated frequency meter (graduated to 130Hz). Moving-coil type DC ammeter

Calibration resistor

RV24YN 10k

For frequency meter calibration. Carbon film type B characteristic

FR Configurator SW3 (VFD setup 
software)

FR-SW3-
SETUP-WE

Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.

Standard control 
circuit terminal 
model, safety stop 
function model, 
CC-Link 
communication 
model

FR Configurator2 (Inverter setup 
software)

SW1DND-FRC2

Supports an inverter startup to maintenance.

Ethernet 
communication 
function model

Name

Model

Applications, Specifications, etc.

Applicable 

Inverter




background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

75

Control terminal option

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

RS-485 2port 
terminal block
FR-E7TR

 

Use the option in exchange with standard control circuit terminals. (This option cannot be used 
simultaneously with the operation panel (FR-PA07) or parameter unit (FR-PU07).)

 Terminal connection diagram

 When using terminals PC-SD as a

24VDC power supply, take care not
to short across terminals PC-SD.

 Terminal input specifications can be

changed by analog input
specifications switchover (Pr. 73).

 Terminal input specifications can be

changed by analog input
specifications switchover (Pr. 267)
Set the voltage/current input switch
in the "V" position to select voltage
input (0 to 5V/0 to10V) and "I" (initial
value) to select current input (4 to
20mA).

 It is recommended to use 2W1k

when the frequency setting signal is
changed frequently. 

 It is not necessary when calibrating

the indicator from the operation
panel.

 Set the switch to the right (ON)

position to pass a shielded wire
across terminal SG.

 Set only the terminating resistor

switch of the remotest inverter to the
"100

" position.

 Communication

 Terminal layout

 Terminal 4 input
(Current input)

SINK

OPEN

SDA

I

SOURCE

(+)

V

100Ω

(-)

Running

Frequency detection

Open collector output

FM

 Open collector output common

SD

Sink/source common

+

-

Indicator (Frequency meter, etc.)

FU

Moving-coil type
1mA full-scale

RUN

Calibration  
resistor

SE

*5

Terminal functions vary with the 
output terminal assignment 

(Pr. 

190, Pr. 191)

SDA

SDB

SDB

RDA

RDA

RDB

RDB

From the computer  
or previous inverter

To the next inverter

EIA-485 (RS-485)  
communication signal

*7

Terminating  
resistor switch

Output stop

Relay output

Relay output
(Alarm output)

A

B

C

Terminal functions vary by

 

Pr. 192 A,B,C terminal 

function selection

Terminal  
2/SG switch

Frequency setting signals (Analog)

 0 to 5VDC

10(+5V)

2

2

3

1

4   4 to 20mADC

Frequency setting 

potentiometer

1/2W1k

Ω

SG  

(Analog common)

*4

*2

*6

*3

O

N

*3

0 to 5VDC

(0 to 10VDC)

0 to 10VDC

Voltage/current  
input switch

Forward rotation start

Reverse rotation start

Middle speed

High speed

Low speed

Reset

Control input signals (No voltage input allowed)

Contact input common

24VDC power supply

(Common for external power supply transistor)

STR

STF

RH

RM

RL

MRS

SD

PC *1

Terminal functions  
vary with the input 
terminal assignment 
(Pr. 178 to Pr. 184)

Multi-speed 
selection

RES

24V

 Control terminal specifications

Item

Description

Communication protocol

Mitsubishi inverter protocol (computer link 
communication), MODBUS RTU protocol

Conforming standard

EIA-485 (RS-485)

Number of connectable 
devices 

32 units maximum

Communication speed

4800/9600/19200/38400bps

Communication method

Half-duplex system

Terminating resistor

100

 (valid/invalid can be changed with a 

terminating resistor switch)

Terminal Symbol

Terminal Name

Description

R

S

-485 c

o

m

m

u

n

ic

atio

n

SDA (2 points)

Inverter send+

Sending signal output terminal from the inverter.

SDB (2 points)

Inverter send-

Inverse sending signal output terminal from the inverter.

RDA (2 points)

Inverter receive+

Receive signal input terminal of the inverter.
Changing the terminating resistor switch to "100

" side connects the inverter to the 100 

terminating resistor.

RDB (2 points)

Inverter receive-

Receive signal input terminal of the inverter.
Changing the terminating resistor switch to "100

" side connects the inverter to the 100 

terminating resistor.

Fr

eq

ue

n

c

y s

e

tt

ing

10

Frequency setting power supply

Used as power supply when connecting potentiometer for frequency setting (speed setting) 
from outside of the inverter. (Specifications are the same as the standard control circuit 
terminal)

2

Frequency setting (voltage)/
Common terminal

Inputting 0 to 5VDC (or 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 5V (10V) and 
makes input and output proportional. (Specifications are the same as the standard control 
circuit terminal)

Set terminal 2/SG switch to the right position (ON) to change terminal 2 to terminal SG to 
pass a shielded wire across terminal SG during RS-485 communication.  In this case, 
voltage at terminal 2 is 0V input.

4

Frequency setting (current)

Inputting 4 to 20mADC (or 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V) provides the maximum output frequency at 
20mA and makes input and output proportional. (Specifications are the same as the standard 
control circuit terminal)

SG

RS-485 communication common,
Analog common

Common terminal of RS-485 communication and frequency setting signal (terminal 2 or 
terminal 4).  Do not earth (ground).

 Specifications of contact input (STF, STR, RH, RM, RL, MRS, RES, SD, PC) and output signal (A. B, C, RUN, FU, SE, FM) are the same as the

standard control circuit terminal.

OPEN

OPEN

100

S

O

URCE

S

O

URCE

SIN

K

SIN

K

V

II

SDA SDB RDA RDB RUN FU SE

SDA SDB RDA RDB SG

2

10

4

RM RH MRS RES SD PC STF STR SD SD

A

B

C

FM RL


background image

76

Stand-alone option

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

Intercompatibility 
attachment
FR-E7AT

FR-A024/A044 series intercompatibility attachment
The FR-E700 series inverter can be installed using installation holes of the conventional FR-
A024/A044 series with this attachment. This attachment is useful for replacing the 
conventional model with the FR-E700 series.
(The depth increases after installation of the inverter when the attachment is used.)

DIN rail mounting
attachments
FR-UDA

Attachment to enable installation of FR-E700 series on DIN rail.

 Selection table

 Approximate dimension

<FR-UDA01>

<FR-UDA02>

<FR-UDA03>

Panel through 
attachment
FR-E7CN

Using this attachment dissipates about 70% of the inverter's heat by having the inverter heatsink protrude from the back side of the 
enclosure.

 Selection table

● Installation drawing

When this attachment is used, a larger installation area is required for the inverter.

Inverter

FR-E7AT

12

Attachment Model

Mountable Models

Compatible Former Models

E720

E740

A024

A044

FR-E7AT01

0.1K

0.1K

0.2K

0.2K

0.4K

0.4K

0.75K

0.75K

FR-E7AT02

1.5K

1.5K

FR-E7AT03

1.5K

1.5K

2.2K

2.2K

2.2K

2.2K

3.7K

3.7K

3.7K

3.7K

Attachment Model

Inverter Capacity

E720

E720S

E710W

FR-UDA01

0.1K, 0.2K, 0.4K, 0.75K

0.1K,0.2K,0.4K

0.1K,0.2K,0.4K

FR-UDA02

1.5K,2.2K

0.75K,1.5K

0.75K

FR-UDA03

3.7K

108

67

68

67

128

128

4-M4  0.7 screw

8.7

3-M4  0.7 screw

Hook

Hook

15

15
10

8.7

8.7

128

67

170

4-M4  0.7 screw

Hook

14.4

(Unit: mm)

Attachment Model

Inverter Capacity

E720

E740

E720S

FR-E7CN01

1.5K, 2.2K

0.75K, 1.5K

FR-E7CN02

3.7K

FR-E7CN03

5.5K, 7.5K

FR-E7CN04

1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K

2.2K

FR-E7CN05

5.5K, 7.5K

FR-E7CN06

11K, 15K

11K, 15K

FR-E7CN

FR-E7CN

Enclosure

Heatsink

Cooling wind


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

77

Totally enclosed 
structure 
specification 
attachment 
FR-E7CV
 for the 
FR-E700 series

IInstalling the attachment to the inverter changes the protective structure of the inverter to the totally enclosed structure (IP40 equivalent as specified 
by JEM1030).

 Selection table

 Outline dimension (Unit: mm)

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

Attachment Model

Applicable inverter model

FR-E7CV01

FR-E720-0.1K to 0.75K

FR-E7CV02

FR-E720-1.5K, 2.2K

FR-E7CV03

FR-E720-3.7K

FR-E7CV04

FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K



Plug-in options cannot be used when the attachment is installed for total
enclosure.



A USB connector cannot be used when any of the FR-E7CV02 to 04 is
installed. 



To meet the requirement of the totally enclosed structure specification, do
not use the inverter with the PU connector cover open.

<FR-E7CV01>

5

118

172

177.7

126.5

44.7

(5.7)

D1

18

30

14.8

69.6

40

56

5

(14.8)

D

(2.4)

4

19.8

30

(19.8)

4-φ22

2-φ5 hole

Screw: M4

Rating plate

Inverter model

D

D1

FR-E720-0.1K, 0.2K

80.5

10

FR-E720-0.4K

112.5

42

FR-E720-0.75K

132.5

62

<FR-E7CV02>

4-φ22

(29.1)

17

17

30

17.1

110.2

35.1

50

(25.1)

96

5

136.3

130.3

(2.4)

5

170

164.3

118

5.8

30

(5.7)

127.3

65

20

25

Rating plate

2-φ5 hole
Screw: M4

<FR-E7CV04>

Rating plate

3-φ28

164

φ22

78.5

2-φ6 hole

44.5

18.5

(5.7)

46.5

244

280.8 286.5

258.8

77.1

28

(77.1)

6

182.2

8.8

(3.2)

159

166

10

43.1

38

29

29 (43.1)

Screw: M5

<FR-E7CV03>

143.3

137.3

(2.4)

5

Rating plate

2-φ5 hole

(31.2)

70

71

172.2

158

60.1

30

30 7 (45 .1)

4-φ22

72

19.2

30

(5.7)

30

118

164.3

170

127.3

5.8

5

Screw: M4


background image

78

AC reactor
(for power 
coordination)
FR-HAL-(H)
K

 Outline dimension

DC reactor
(for power 
coordination)
FR-HEL-(H
)K

 Outline dimension

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

(Unit: mm)

(Note) 1. Make selection according to the applied motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than 

the motor capacity, make selection according to the motor capacity)

2. Approximately 88% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (92.3% when calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental 

wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(Effect of power factor may decline slightly when using a single-phase power input model.)

3. Outline dimension drawing shown is a one of a typical model. The shape differs according to each models.
4. Install the AC reactor (FR-HAL) horizontally or vertically.
5. Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. (Keep a minimum clearance of 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 

5cm each on right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)

Inverter Model

W

D

H

Mass 

(kg)

Inverter Model

W

D

H

Mass 

(kg)

200V

0.4K

104

72

99

0.6

400V

H0.4K

135

59.6

115

1.5

0.75K

104

74

99

0.8

H0.75K

135

59.6

115

1.5

1.5K

104

77

99

1.1

H1.5K

135

59.6

115

1.5

2.2K

115

77

115

1.5

H2.2K

135

59.6

115

1.5

3.7K

115

83

115

2.2

H3.7K

135

70.6

115

2.5

5.5K

115

83

115

2.3

H5.5K

160

72

142

3.5

7.5K

130

100

135

4.2

H7.5K

160

91

142

5.0

11K

160

111

164

5.2

H11K

160

91

146

6.0

15K

160

126

167

7.0

H15K

220

105

195

9.0

H

W

Less than D

(Unit: mm)

Inverter Model

W

D

H

Mass 

(kg)

Inverter Model

W

D

H

Mass 

(kg)

200V

0.4K

70

61

71

0.4

400V

H0.4K

90

60

78

0.6

0.75K

85

61

81

0.5

H0.75K

66

70

100

0.8

1.5K

85

70

81

0.8

H1.5K

66

80

100

1

2.2K

85

70

81

0.9

H2.2K

76

80

110

1.3

3.7K

77

82

92

1.5

H3.7K

86

95

120

2.3

5.5K

77

92

92

1.9

H5.5K

96

100

128

3

7.5K

86

98

113

2.5

H7.5K

96

105

128

3.5

11K

105

112

133

3.3

H11K

105

110

137

4.5

15K

105

115

133

4.1

H15K

105

125

152

5

H

W

Less than D

(Note) 1. Be sure to remove the jumper across the inverter terminals P/+-P1. (A failure to do so will produce no power factor improving effect))

2. The wiring length between the reactor and inverter should be within 5m. 
3. The size of the cables used should be equal to or larger than that of the power supply cables (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3).
4. Make selection according to the motor capacity. (When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, make selection according to 

the motor capacity)

5. Approximately 93% of the power factor improving effect can be obtained (94.4% when calculated with 1 power factor for the fundamental 

wave according to the Architectural Standard Specifications (Electrical Installation) (2013 revision) supervised by the Ministry of Land, 
Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism of Japan).
(Effect of power factor may decline slightly when using a single-phase 200V power input model.)

6. Outline dimension drawing shown is a one of a typical model.

The shape differs according to each model.

7. Install the DC reactor (FR-HEL) horizontally or vertically.
8. Keep enough clearance around the reactor because it heats up. (Keep a minimum clearance of 10cm each on top and bottom and minimum 

5cm each on right and left regardless of the installation orientation.)

9. Single-phase 100V power input model is not compatible with the DC reactor.


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

79

EMC Directive 
compliant EMC filter
SF

FR-E5NF-HK
(400V class)
FR-S5NFSA-
K
(100V / 200V class)

The EMC compliant EMC filter (EN61800-3 2nd Environment Category C3) is a filter compliant with the EU EMC Directive  (EN61800-3

 

2nd 

Environment Category C3).

Radio noise filter
FR-BIF (200V class)
FR-BIF-H (400V class)

 Outline dimension

(Note) 1.  Cannot be connected to the inverter output side. 

2.  The wire should be cut as short as possible, and connected to the inverter terminal block.
3.  To use the radio noise filter (FR-BIF) for the single-phase input model, ensure the insulation of the T-phase before connecting the filter to the 

input side of the inverter.

Line noise filter
FR-BSF01

(for inverters with 
small capacities)

FR- BLF

 Outline dimension

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

 Depth is 12mm deeper when an intercompatibility attachment is installed. 

 Leakage current for one phase of three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply. Leakage current for all phases

of three-phase three-wire delta-connection power supply is three times greater than the indicated value. 

(Note) This is a sample outline dimension drawing. The shape differs by the model.

Countermeasures for leakage current
Take the following actions to prevent malfunction of peripheral devices or an electric shock caused by leakage 
current. 
1) Earth (ground) the EMC filter before connecting the power supply. When doing so, confirm that earthing (grounding)

is securely performed through the earthing (grounding) part of the enclosure. 

2) Select an appropriate earth leakage circuit breaker or an earth leakage relay by considering leakage current of the EMC filter. Note that earth

leakage circuit breaker may not be used in some cases such as when leakage current of the EMC filter is too large. In that case, use an earth
leakage relay with high sensitivity. When both of earth leakage circuit breaker and earth leakage relay cannot be used, securely earth (ground) as
explained in 1).

EMC filter Model Applicable inverter model Intercompatibility

attachment 



Outline dimension

(Unit: mm)

Mass

(kg)

Leakage 

current 

(mA) 

 

(reference 

value) 

Loss

(W)

W

H

D

SF1306

FR-E720-0.1K to 1.5K

110

200

36.5 0.7

10

7.3

SF1309

FR-E720-2.2K, 3.7K

FR-E5T

200

282

57

2.1

15

15

FR-E720S-2.2K

FR-E7AT03

SF1320

FR-E720S-0.1K to 0.4K

70

168

30.5 0.4

10

2.7

SF1321

FR-E720S-0.75K

110

168

36.5 0.6

10

3.8

FR-E5NF-H0.75K

FR-E740-0.4K, 0.75K

140

210

46

1.1

22.6

5.5

FR-E5NF-H3.7K

FR-E740-1.5K to 3.7K

140

210

46

1.2

44.5

8

FR-E5NF-H7.5K

FR-E740-5.5K, 7.5K

220

210

47

2

68.4

15

FR-S5NFSA-0.75K FR-E710W-0.1K to 0.4K

70

168

35

0.5

4.5

1.74

FR-S5NFSA-1.5K

FR-E720S-1.5K

FR-E710W-0.75K

110

168

35

0.7

9.5

8.55

EMC filter Model Applicable inverter model Intercompatibility

attachment 



Outline dimension

(Unit: mm)

Mass

(kg)

Leakage 

current 

(mA) 

 

(reference 

value) 

Loss

(W)

W

H

D

D1

SF1260

FR-E720-5.5K, 7.5K

FR-E5T-02

222

468

80

39

5

440

118

FR-E720-11K

FR-A5AT03

SF1261

FR-E720-15K

FR-AAT02

253

600

86

38

9.3

71

37

SF1175

FR-E740-11K, 15K

FR-AAT02

253

530

60

35

4.7

76

56

W

H

D

W

H

D

D1

300

29

58

41

29

7

44

4

φ4.3 hole

R S T

Leakage currents: 4mA

(Unit: mm)

Red White Blue

Green

Earth (Ground)

Radio noise filter

FR-BIF(-H)

T/L3

S/L2

R/L1

Inverter

MCCB

Power

supply

<Three-phase power supply>

Earth (Ground)

Radio noise filter

FR-BIF(-H)

S/L2

R/L1

Inverter

MCCB

Power

supply

<Single-phase power supply>

Insulate

FR-BSF01

FR-BLF

(Note)  1. Each phase should be wound at least 3 times (4T, 

4 turns) in the same direction. (The greater the 
number of turns, the more effective result is 
obtained.)
When using several line noise filters to make 4T or 
more, wind the phases (cables) together. Do not 
use different line noise filters for different phases.

2. When the thickness of the wire prevents winding, 

use at least 4 in series and ensure that the current 
passes through each phase in the same direction.

3. Can be used on the output side in the same way 

as the input side. When using filters on the output 
side, do not wind the cable more than 3 times (4T) 
for each filter because the filter may overheat.

4. Use FR-BSF01 for the inverters with small 

capacities. Thick wires (38mm

2

 or more) cannot 

be used. In such cases, use the FR-BLF.

5. Do not wind an earthing cable.

110

95

2-

φ5

22.5

65
33

65

4.5

130

160
180

2.3

80

35

7

φ7

31.5

85

Line noise filter

T/L3

S/L2

R/L1

Inverter

MCCB

Power 

supply


background image

80

Filterpack 
FR-BFP2-(H)
K

Using the option, the inverter may conform to the Japanese guideline for reduction of harmonic emission.

The option is available for three-phase 200V/400V class inverters with 0.4K to 15K capacity.

 Specification

 Outline dimension drawing

<FR-BFP2-0.4K, 0.75K, 1.5K, 2.2K, 3.7K>

<FR-BFP2-5.5K, 7.5K, 11K, 15K>

<FR-BFP2-H0.4K, H0.75K, H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K>

<FR-BFP2-H5.5K, H7.5K, H11K, H15K>

(Note) 1.  The option can be installed to the back or to the side. (The option cannot be installed to the back of FR-E720-5.5K/7.5K, FR-E740-0.4K to 3.7K.)

2.  Above outline dimension drawings are examples. Dimensions differ by model.

Brake resistor
MRS type, MYS type

 Outline dimension

MRS type

MYS type

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

• Three-phase 200V power input model

• Three-phase 400V power input mode

 Select a capacity for the load (inverter output) current to be equal to or less than the permissible inverter output current. 

 The indicated leakage current is for one phase of the three-phase three-wire star-connection power supply. 

 The values in parentheses are calculated with 1 fundamental frequency power factor according to the Year 2013 Standard specification for public

constructions (electric installation works), published by the Ministry of Land, Infrastructure, Transport and Tourism in Japan.

Model FR-BFP2-K

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Permissible inverter output current (A) 



2.5

4.2

7

10

16.5

23.8

31.8

45

58

Approximate mass (kg)

1.3

1.4

2.0

2.2

2.8

3.8

4.5

6.7

7.0

Power factor improving reactor

Install a DC reactor on the DC side.

93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% 

)

Noise filter 

Common mode choke

Install a ferrite core on the input side.

Capacitive filter

About 4mA of capacitor leakage current 



Protective structure (JEM1030)

Open type (IP00)

Model FR-BFP2-HK

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

Permissible inverter output current (A) 



1.2

2.2

3.7

5

8.1

12

16.3

23

29.5

Approximate mass (kg)

1.6

1.7

1.9

2.3

2.6

4.5

5.0

7.0

8.2

Power factor improving reactor

Install a DC reactor on the DC side.

93% to 95% of power supply power factor under 100% load (94.4% 

)

Noise filter 

Common mode choke

Install a ferrite core on the input side.

Capacitive filter

About 8mA of capacitor leakage current 



Protective structure (JEM1030)

Open type (IP00)

5

D1
D

4.5

D2

D2

H1

5

5

W1
W

W2

4.5

W2

H

H1

5

2-

φ4.5 hole

2-

φ4.5 hole

Rating

 plate

D

12.5

C1

C1

12.5

D1

H1

H

145

195

220

H2

25

(25)

25

H2

L-bracket for inverter
 back installation
(Enclosed with the option)

2-

fC hole

2-

fC hole

Rating

 plate

H1

H2

H2

Capacity

W

W1 W2

H

H1

D

D1

D2

20

0V

0.4K, 0.75K

68

30

19 218 208

60

30

15

1.5K, 2.2K

108

55 26.5 188 178

80

55 12.5

3.7K

170 120

25 188 178

65

40 12.5

400V

H0.4K, H0.75K

108

55 26.5 188 178

55

30 12.5

H1.5K, H2.2K, H3.7K 108

55 26.5 188 178

80

55 12.5

(Unit: mm)

 The 400V class H0.4K and H0.75K have no slit.

Capacity

H

H1 H2

D

D1

C

C1 C2

200V

5.5K, 7.5K

210 198

6

75

50 4.5 4.5 5.3

11K

320 305 7.5 85

60

6

6

5.3

15K

320 305 7.5 85

60

6

6

6.4

400V

H5.5K, H7.5K 210 198

6

75

50 4.5 4.5 4.3

H11K

320 305 7.5 85

60

6

6

4.3

H15K

320 305 7.5 85

60

6

6

6.4

(Unit: mm)

 L-bracket is not attached when shipped from the factory but is enclosed

with the option. L-bracket is required to install the option to the back of

inverter. 

500

Round 

crimp 

terminals

1.25-4

182

172

φ4.3 hole

42

4.3

20

1.2

(Unit : mm)

500

230
220

20

3.5

60

4.3

(Unit : mm)

Round 

crimp 

terminals

1.25-4

 The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.

 Two unit in parallel

Resistor Model

Control torque / 

permissible duty

Resistance 

Value

(

)

Permissible 

Power

(W)

Applicable 

Motor Capacity

(kW)

200V

 



MRS 

type

MRS120W200

150% torque 3%ED

200

15

0.4

(Note) 1. The temperature of the brake resistor 

becomes 200ºC or more depending on 
the operation frequency, care must be 
taken for installation and heat 
dissipation. 

2. The brake resistor cannot be used with 

the 0.1K and 0.2K.

MRS120W100

100

30

0.75

MRS120W60

60

55

1.5

100% torque 3%ED

2.2

MRS120W40

150% torque 3%ED

40

80

2.2

100% torque 3%ED

3.7

MYS 
type

MYS220W50 



150% torque 3%ED

50/2

2

80

3.7

100% torque 6%ED


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

81

High-duty
brake resistor
FR-ABR-(H)
K

 Outline dimension

Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)
K

Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)
K

Discharging resistor
GZG type
GRZG type

A brake unit is an option that fully enhances the regenerative braking capability of the inverter, and should be used with an electrical-
discharge resistor. Select from two discharging resistor according to the required braking torque.

 Specification

<Brake Unit>

<Discharging resistor>

<Resistor unit>

 Combinations of brake unit and resistor unit

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

(Unit: mm)

 The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.
 For the 1.5K and 2.2K inverter.
 For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 resistors are connected in parallel.
 For the 15K brake resistor, configure so that two 18 resistors are connected in series. FR-ABR-15K is indicated on the resistor. 

(same resistor as the 200V class 15K)

(Note) 1. The regenerative brake duty setting should be less than permissible brake duty in the table 

above.

2. The temperature of the brake resistor becomes 300

C or more depending on the operation 

frequency, care must be taken for installation and heat dissipation. 

3. MYS type resistor can be also used. Note that the permissible brake duty.
4. The brake resistor cannot be used with the 0.1K and 0.2K.
5. Do not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 except when connecting a DC reactor.

Brake Resistor 

Model

Permissible 

Brake

Duty

Outline Dimension

R

esist

an

ce

Va

lu

e

(

)

A

p

pr

ox

. Ma

s

s

(k

g

)

Brake Resistor 

Model

Permissible 

Brake

Duty

Outline Dimension

R

esist

an

ce

Va

lu

e

(

)

A

p

pr

ox

. Ma

s

s

(k

g

)

W

W1

D

H

W

W1

D

H

20

0V



FR-ABR-0.4K

10%

140 500

40

21

200

0.2

400V

FR-ABR-H0.4K

10%

115 500

40

21

1200

0.2

FR-ABR-0.75K

10%

215 500

40

21

100

0.4

FR-ABR-H0.75K

10%

140 500

40

21

700

0.2

FR-ABR-2.2K



10%

240 500

50

26

60

0.5

FR-ABR-H1.5K

10%

215 500

40

21

350

0.4

FR-ABR-H2.2K

10%

240 500

50

26

250

0.5

FR-ABR-3.7K

10%

215 500

61

33

40

0.8

FR-ABR-H3.7K

10%

215 500

61

33

150

0.8

FR-ABR-5.5K

10%

335 500

61

33

25

1.3

FR-ABR-H5.5K

10%

335 500

61

33

110

1.3

FR-ABR-7.5K

10%

400 500

80

40

20

2.2

FR-ABR-H7.5K

10%

400 500

80

40

75

2.2

FR-ABR-11K

6%

400 700 100

50

13

3.5

FR-ABR-H11K

6%

400 700 100

50

52

3.2

FR-ABR-15K



6%

300 700 100

50

18

(

1/2)

2.4

(

2)

FR-ABR-H15K



6%

300 700 100

50

18

(

2)

2.4

(

2)

W

W1+20

0

D

H

 The option can also be connected to a single-phase 100V class inverter.

Model FR-BU2-

200V 



400V

1.5K

3.7K

7.5K

15K

30K

H7.5K

H15K

H30K

Applicable motor capacity

Capacity of the motor to be used with differs according to the braking torque and duty (%ED)

Connected brake resistor

GRZG type, FR-BR (refer to the table below for combinations)

Multiple (parallel) operation

Up to 10 units 

(note that torque generated is not more than the tolerable overcurrent amount of connected inverter)

Approximate mass (kg)

0.9

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.4

0.9

0.9

1.4

 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400V class, 2 sets are required.

Model GRZG type 



200V

400V

GZG300W-50

 

(1 unit)

GRZG200-10

 

(3 units)

GRZG300-5

 

(4 units)

GRZG400-2

 

(6 units)

GRZG200-10

 

(3 units)

GRZG300-5

 

(4 units)

GRZG400-2

 

(6 units)

Number of connectable units

1 unit

3 in series

(1 set)

4 in series

(1 set)

6 in series

(1 set)

6 in series

(2 sets)

8 in series

(2 sets)

12 in series

(2 sets)

Brake resistor total resistance value (

)

50

30

20

12

60

40

24

Continuous permissible power (W)

100

300

600

1200

600

1200

2400

Model FR-BR-

200V

400V

15K

30K

H15K

H30K

Brake resistor total resistance value (

)

8

4

32

16

Continuous permissible power (W)

990

1990

990

1990

Approximate mass (kg)

15

30

15

30

 The 1 set contains the number of units in the parentheses. For the 400V class, 2 sets are required.

Brake Unit

Discharging Resistor/Resistor Unit Model

GRZG type

FR-BR

Model 



Number of connectable units

200V

class

FR-BU2-1.5K

GZG 300W-50

 (1 unit)

1 unit

FR-BU2-3.7K

GRZG 200-10

 (3 units) 

3 in series (1 set)

FR-BU2-7.5K

GRZG 300-5

 (4 units) 

4 in series (1 set)

FR-BU2-15K

GRZG 400-2

 (6 units) 

6 in series (1 set)

FR-BR-15K

FR-BU2-30K

FR-BR-30K

400V

class

FR-BU2-H7.5K

GRZG 200-10

 (3 units) 

6 in series (2 sets)

FR-BU2-H15K

GRZG 300-5

 (4 units) 

8 in series (2 sets)

FR-BR-H15K

FR-BU2-H30K

GRZG 400-2

 (6 units) 

12 in series (2 sets)

FR-BR-H30K


background image

82

Brake unit
FR-BU2-(H)
K

Resistor unit
FR-BR-(H)
K

Discharging resistor
GZG type
GRZG type

 Selection

<When FR-BR is connected>

The temperature rise of the resistor unit is about a maximum of 100

C. Therefore, use heat-resistant wires (such as glass wires).

 Connection diagram

 Outline dimension drawings

<FR-BU2>

<GZG,GRZG>

<FR-BR>

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

<When GRZG type is connected>

The maximum temperature rise of the discharging resistors is approximately 100

C. Use heat-resistant wires and wire to avoid contact 

with resistors.

Do not touch the discharging resistor while the power is ON or for about 10 minutes after the power supply turns OFF. Otherwise you 

may get an electric shock.

 The number before the model name explains the number of connectable units in parallel.

 The inverter for 400V class 1.5K or lower cannot be used in combination with a brake unit. To use in combination with a brake unit, use the inverter of

2.2K or higher.

Power Supply 

Voltage

Motor (kW)

Braking torque

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

11

15

200V

class

50% 30s

FR-BU2-1.5K

FR-BU2-3.7K

FR-BU2-7.5K

FR-BU2-15K

100% 30s

FR-BU2-1.5K

FR-BU2-3.7K

FR-BU2-7.5K

FR-BU2-15K

 FR-BU2-15K

400V

class

50% 30s



FR-BU2-H7.5K

FR-BU2-H15K

100% 30s



FR-BU2-H7.5K

FR-BU2-H15K

FR-BU2-H30K

%ED at short-time rating when braking torque is 100%

Braking torque (%) at short-time rating when 10%ED is 15s

Motor Capacity

5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW

Motor Capacity

5.5kW 7.5kW 11kW 15kW

200V

class

FR-BU2-15K

%ED

80

40

15

10

200V

class

FR-BU2-15K

Injection brake
torque (%)

280

200

120

100

FR-BU2-30K

65

30

FR-BU2-30K

260

180

400V

class

FR-BU2-H15K

%ED

80

40

15

10

400V

class

FR-BU2-H15K Injection brake

torque (%)

280

200

120

100

FR-BU2-H30K

65

30

FR-BU2-H30K

260

180

Example 1  Travel operation

Example 2  Lift operation

Time t

tc

tb

Speed

Speed

Time t

Descending

Ascending

tc

t1

t2

tb=t1+t2+t3+t4

t3

t4

Regeneration duty factor (operation frequency)%ED 

tb<15s (continuous operation time)

tb
tc

100

PR

N/-

MSG
SD
MSG
SD

P/+

P

A
B
C

PR

RES

SD

U
V
W

P/+

N/-

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

IM

PR

N/-

MSG
SD
MSG
SD

P/+

P

A
B
C

PR

MCCB

MC

*1

RES
BUE
SD

*2

*2

*2

Three-phase 
AC power supply

Resistor unit or 
discharging resistor

Resistor unit or 
discharging resistor

Brake unit

FR-BU2

When connecting  

several brake units

Brake unit

FR-BU2

Motor

Signal for 
master/slave

Inverter

Reset 

Brake permission signal

*1

BUE

MC

OFF

ON

MC

*3

 A jumper is connected across BUE and SD in the 

initial status.

 Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and 

brake unit (FR-BU2) terminals so that their 
terminal symbols match with each other. 
Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Do 
not remove a jumper across terminal P/+ and P1 
except when connecting a DC reactor.

 When the power supply is 400V class, install a 

step-down transformer.

H

W

D

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

FR-BU2-1.5K to 15K

68

128

132.5

FR-BU2-30K

108

128

129.5

FR-BU2-H7.5K, H15K

68

128

132.5

FR-BU2-H30K

108

128

129.5

D

H

W

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

GZG300W

335

78

40

GRZG200

306

55

26

GRZG300

334

79

40

GRZG400

411

79

40

(Unit: mm)

Model

W

H

D

FR-BR-15K

170

450

220

FR-BR-30K

340

600

220

FR-BR-H15K

170

450

220

FR-BR-H30K

340

600

220

W

H

D


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

83

Power regeneration 
common converter
FR-CV-(H)
K

Enables 100%-torque continuous regeneration to support continuous regenerative operation for line control, etc. (Maximum torque 150% 60s)

Eliminates the need to use a brake unit with each inverter, reducing total space and total cost.

Saves energy since regeneration energy is used for the other inverters and excess energy is returned to the power supply.

Heatsink protrusion type has the heat generating section outside of the enclosure, and exhaust the converter generated heat to the outside 
of enclosure.

 Connection diagram

 Keep power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, T/L3) open. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter. Opposite polarity of terminals N/-, P/+ will damage 

the inverter.

 Do not insert an MCCB between the terminals P/+-N/- (between P/L+-P/+, between N/L--N/-). Connect the inverter terminals (P/+, N/-) and power 

regeneration common converter terminals so that their terminal symbols match with each other. Incorrect connection will damage the inverter.

 Assign the terminal for X10 signal using any of Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 (input terminal function selection).

 Always connect the power supply and terminals R/L11, S/L21, T/MC1. If the inverter is operated without connection, the power regeneration common 

converter will be damaged.

 Install the dedicated stand-alone reactor (FR-CVL) horizontally.

 Be sure to connect terminal RDY of the FR-CV to the X10 or MRS signal assigned terminal of the inverter, and connect terminal SE of the FR-CV to 

terminal SD of the inverter. Without proper connecting, FR-CV will be damaged.

 Outline dimension drawings

High power factor 
converter
FR-HC2- (H)
K

 Specifications

 Outline dimension

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

R/L

11

Dedicated stand-alone 
reactor (FR-CVL)

S/L

21

T/L

31

R2/L

12

S2/L

22

T2/L

32

R2/L

1

S2/L

2

T2/L

3

R/L

11

S/L

21

T/MC1

P/L+

U

V

W

IM

FR-CV type power 
regeneration common converter

Inverter

PC
SD

X10
RES
SD

P24

SD

RDYB

RSO

SE

RDYA

N/L-

*3

*6

*2

*4

*4

R/L1
S/L2
T/L3

P/+
N/-

*1

Three-phase 
AC power supply

MCCB

MC

1

*5

H

H

W

W

D1

D

D

W

H

D1

D

<FR-CV-(H)>

<FR-CV-(H)-AT>

<FR-CVL>

FR-CV-(H)

 (Unit mm)

FR-CV-(H)-AT

(Unit mm)

FR-CVL

(Unit mm)

Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

D1 Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

D1

200V

7.5K/11K

90

300 303 103

400V

7.5K/11K/15K

120 300 305 105

15K

120 300 305 105

22K/30K

150 380 322 122

22K/30K

150 380 305 105

37K/55K

400 620 250 135

37K/55K

400 620 250 135

Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

D1

Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

D1

20

0V

7.5K/11K

110 330 315 115

40

0V 7.5K/11K/15K

130 330 320 120

15K

130 330 320 120

22K/30K

160 410 350 150

22K/30K

160 410 350 150

Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

Voltage/Capacity

W

H

D

200

V

7.5K/11K/15K

165 155 130

40

0

V

7.5K/11K

220 200 135

22K

165 155 140

15K

220 205 135

30K

215 175 160

22K

220 215 150

37K

220 200 320

30K

245 220 185

55K

250 225 335

37K

245 265 230

55K

290 280 230

Provided appliances

(FR-HCL21)(FR-HCB2)(FR-HCL22) FR-HC2

Substantially suppresses power harmonics to realize the 
equivalent capacity conversion factor K5 = 0 in "the Harmonic 
Suppression Guidelines for Consumers Who Receive High 
Voltage or Special High Voltage" in Japan.

The power regeneration function comes standard.

The common converter driving with several inverters is possible.

Model FR-HC2- 



200V

400V

 The total capacity of the connected inverters.
 If a high power factor converter (FR-HC2) is 

purchased, it comes with reactor 1 (FR-HCL21), 
reactor 2 (FR-HCL22), and an outside box (FRHCB2)
(If an H280K or higher is purchased, it comes with 
FR-HCL21, FR-HCL22, FR-HCC2, FR-HCR2, and 
FR-HCM2.)

7.5K

15K

30K

55K

75K

H560K

Applicable inverter 

capacity 



3.7K to 

7.5K

7.5K to 

15K

15K to 

30K

30K to 

55K

37K to 

75K

280K to 560K

Rated input voltage/
frequency

Three-phase 200V to 220V 50Hz

200V to 230V 60Hz

Three-phase 380V 

to 460V 50/60Hz

Rated input current (A)

33

61

115

215

278

993

(Unit: mm)

Voltage Capacity

High Power Factor Converter

FR-HC2

Reactor 1

FR-HCL21 



Reactor 2

FR-HCL22 



Outside Box

FR-HCB2 



W

H

D

W

H

D

W

H

D

W

H

D

200V

7.5K

220

260

170

132

150

100

237.5

230

140

190

320

165

15K

250

400

190

162

172

126

257.5

260

165

30K

325

550

195

195

210

150

342.5

305

180

270

450

203

55K

370

620

250

210

180

200.5

432.5

380

280

75K

465

620

300

240

215

215.5

474

460

280

400

450

250

400V

H560K

790

1330

440

452

545

645

632

720

745

High power factor converter

W

D

H

Reactor 1, Reactor 2

H

W

D

Outside box

W

H

D

PSCLR

P.CPY PWR
REGEN

DRIVE

.......

FAN

 Install reactors (FR-HCL21 and 22) on a horizontal 

surface.

 FR-HCB2 is not provided for H280K or higher. A 

filter capacitor and inrush current limit resistors are 
provided instead.


background image

84

Surge voltage 
suppression filter
FR-BMF-H
K

When driving the 400V class motor by the inverter, this filter suppresses the surge voltage generates at the motor terminal.

This can be applied to FR-E740-5.5K to 15K.

 Specifications

 Connection diagram

 Outline dimension

Name (Model)

Specifications, Structure, etc.

Model FR-BMF-HK

7.5

15

Applicable motor 

capacity (kW) 



5.5

7.5

11

15

Rated current (A)

17

31

Overload current 

rating



150  60s, 200% 0.5s 

 (inverse-time characteristics)

Rated input AC 

voltage



Three phase 380 to 480V

Permissible AC 

voltage fluctuation



323 to 528V

Maximum frequency



120Hz

PWM carrier frequency

2kHz or less



Protective structure 

(JEM 1030)

Open type (IP00)

Cooling system

Self-cooling

Maximum wiring 

length

100m or less

Approximate mass 

(kg)

5.5

9.5

En

v

ir

o

n

m

en

t

Surrounding air 

temperature

-10°C to +50°C(non-freezing)

Ambient humidity

90%RH maximum (non-condensing)

Atmosphere

Indoors (free from corrosive gas, flammable gas, 

oil mist, dust and dirt)

Altitude/vibration

Maximum 1000m, 5.9m/s

2

 or less at 10 to 55Hz 

(directions of X, Y, Z axes) 



 The applied motor capacity indicated is the maximum capacity applicable for use of the Mitsubishi Electric 4-pole standard motor.
 The capacity depends on the specifications of the inverter (400V class) connected. 
 The setting of Pr.72 PWM frequency selection should be 2kHz or less.
 When using with the filter pack installed on the rear panel, do not install this combination on moving objects or places that have vibrations  

(exceeding 1.96m/s2).

R

S
T

X

Y

Z

TH0

TH1

FR-BMF

Motor

within 100m

IM

U

V

W

Inverter

* Install a step-down transformer.

MCCB

MC

Three-phase 
AC power  
supply

T*

ON

MC

OFF

MC

7.5

7.5

60

149.5

325 340

325

370

Crimp terminal 5.5-4

6

2.3

Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M4)

Control terminal block (M3)

(U)

Red

Blue

(W)

(V)

White

2.3

6

195

208

150

230

4-M4

4-M5

245

138

Rating  plate

2- φ 6 hole

13.5

75

45

X

Terminal layout

Y Z

TH0 TH1

Earth terminal (M5)

Rating  plate

10

165

80

285

380

500

480

2- φ 10 hole

205

Isolation cap color

Main terminal block (M5)

Control terminal block (M3)

2.3

420

Red

(U)

2.3

Crimp terminal: 8-6

Blue

(W)

(V)

White

10

180

260

195

230

6-M5

4-M8

245

457

33

10

31

100

50

X

Terminal layout

Y Z

TH0 TH1

Earth terminal

(M6)

FR-BMF-H15K

FR-BMF-H7.5K

(Unit: mm)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

85

Peripheral devices/cable size list

Vo

lt

a

g

e

Applicable Inverter 

Motor 

Output

(kW)

Molded Case Circuit Breaker 

(MCCB)



or Earth Leakage Current Breaker 

(ELB)



 (NF or NV type)

Input Side 

Magnetic 

Contactor



Recommended Cable 

Gauge (mm

2

)



Reactor

Power Factor Improving (AC or 

DC) Reactor Connection

Power Factor 

Improving (AC or 

DC) Reactor 

Connection

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3



U, V, W FR-HAL FR-HEL

Power Factor 

Improving (AC or 

DC) Reactor 

Connection

Without

With

Without

With

Without

With

Three-phase 200V

FR-E720-0.1K

0.1

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.4K



0.4K



FR-E720-0.2K

0.2

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.4K



0.4K



FR-E720-0.4K

0.4

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.4K

0.4K

FR-E720-0.75K

0.75

10A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.75K

0.75K

FR-E720-1.5K

1.5

15A

15A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

1.5K

1.5K

FR-E720-2.2K

2.2

20A

15A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

2.2K

2.2K

FR-E720-3.7K

3.7

30A

30A

S-T21

S-T10

3.5

3.5

3.5

3.7K

3.7K

FR-E720-5.5K

5.5

50A

40A

S-T35

S-T21

5.5

5.5

5.5

5.5K

5.5K

FR-E720-7.5K

7.5

60A

50A

S-T35

S-T35

14

8

8

7.5K

7.5K

FR-E720-11K

11

75A

75A

S-T35

S-T35

14

14

14

11K

11K

FR-E720-15K

15

125A

100A

S-T50

S-T50

22

22

22

15K

15K

Three-phase 400V

FR-E740-0.4K

0.4

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

H0.4K

H0.4K

FR-E740-0.75K

0.75

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

H0.75K

H0.75K

FR-E740-1.5K

1.5

10A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

H1.5K

H1.5K

FR-E740-2.2K

2.2

15A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

H2.2K

H2.2K

FR-E740-3.7K

3.7

20A

15A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

H3.7K

H3.7K

FR-E740-5.5K

5.5

30A

20A

S-T21

S-T12

3.5

2

2

H5.5K

H5.5K

FR-E740-7.5K

7.5

30A

30A

S-T21

S-T21

3.5

3.5

3.5

H7.5K

H7.5K

FR-E740-11K

11

50A

40A

S-T21

S-T21

5.5

5.5

5.5

H11K

H11K

FR-E740-15K

15

60A

50A

S-T35

S-T21

8

5.5

5.5

H15K

H15K

Single-Phase 200V

FR-E720S-0.1K

0.1

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.4K



0.4K



FR-E720S-0.2K

0.2

5A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.4K



0.4K



FR-E720S-0.4K

0.4

10A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.75K



0.75K



FR-E720S-0.75K

0.75

15A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

1.5K



1.5K



FR-E720S-1.5K

1.5

20A

20A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

2.2K



2.2K



FR-E720S-2.2K

2.2

40A

30A

S-T21

S-T10

3.5

3.5

2

3.7K



3.7K



Sing

le-Phase 100V

FR-E710W-0.1K

0.1

10A

5A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

0.75K

, 





FR-E710W-0.2K

0.2

10A

10A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

1.5K







FR-E710W-0.4K

0.4

15A

15A

S-T10

S-T10

2

2

2

2.2K







FR-E710W-0.75K

0.75

30A

20A

S-T10

S-T10

3.5

3.5

2

3.7K









Select an MCCB according to the inverter power supply capacity.
Install one MCCB per inverter.



For use in the United States or Canada, refer to "Instructions for UL and cUL" in the Instruction Manual (Basic), and select an appropriate fuse or molded
case circuit breaker (MCCB).



The magnetic contactor is selected based on the AC-1 class. The electrical durability of magnetic contactor is 500,000 times. When the magnetic contactor
is used for emergency stop during motor driving, the electrical durability is 25 times.
If using an MC for emergency stop during motor driving, select an MC regarding the inverter input side current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current. When
using an MC on the inverter output side for commercial-power supply operation switching using a general purpose motor, select an MC regarding the motor
rated current as JEM1038-AC-3 class rated current.



When using a single-phase power input model, terminals are R/L1 and S/L2. 



The cable size is that of the cable (HIV cable (600V class 2 vinyl-insulated cable) etc.) with continuous maximum permissible temperature of 75°C.
Assumes that the surrounding air temperature is 50°C or less and the wiring distance is 20m or less.



When connecting a single-phase 100V power input inverter to a power transformer (50kVA or more), install a AC reactor (FR-HAL) so that the performance
is more reliable. 



The power factor may be slightly lower.



Single-phase 100V power input model is not compatible with DC reactor.

Note

When the inverter capacity is larger than the motor capacity, select an MCCB and a magnetic contactor according to
the inverter type and cable and reactor according to the motor output.

When the breaker on the inverter primary side trips, check for the wiring fault (short circuit), damage to internal parts
of the inverter, etc. Identify the cause of the trip, then remove the cause and power on the breaker.

MCCB

INV

MCCB

INV

IM

IM


background image

86

Selecting the rated sensitivity current for the earth leakage current breaker

When using the earth leakage current breaker with the inverter
circuit, select its rated sensitivity current as follows,
independently of the PWM carrier frequency.

Example

(Note) 1 Install the earth leakage breaker (ELB) on the input side of the inverter.

2 In the 

 connection earthed-neutral system, the sensitivity current is blunt 

against an earth (ground) fault in the inverter output side. Earthing (Grounding) 
must conform to the requirements of national and local safety regulations and 
electrical codes. (NEC section 250, IEC 536 class 1 and other applicable 
standards)

Selection example (in the case of the above figure)

Breaker designed for harmonic and surge suppression
Rated sensitivity current I

n10(Ig1+Ign+Igi+Ig2+Igm)

Standard breaker
Rated sensitivity current I

n10{Ig1+Ign+Igi+3X(Ig2+Igm)}

Ig1, Ig2: Leakage currents in wire path during commercial power supply

operation

Ign

: Leakage current of inverter input side noise filter

Igm

: Leakage current of motor during commercial power supply operation

Igi

: Leakage current of inverter unit

(200V  60Hz)

(200V  60Hz)

0

2 0

4 0

6 0

8 0

100

120

2 3.5

5.5

8 1422

30

38

60

80

100

150

Motor capacity (kW)

Example of leakage current of
cable path per 1km during the
commercial power supply operation
when the CV cable is routed in 
metal conduit

Example of leakage current 
of three-phase induction motor
during the commercial
power supply operation

Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

Cable size (mm

2

)

0.1 0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5 11

7.5

20

15

0.02

0.03

0.05

0.07

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.5

0.7

1.0

 

 

0

20

40

60

80

100

120

2 3.5

5.5

8 1422

30

38

60

80

100

150

0. 1

0. 2

0. 3

0. 5

0. 7

1. 0

2. 0

1.5

3.7

2.2

7.5

15

11 20

5.5

Motor capacity (kW)

For "   " connection, the amount of leakage current is appox.1/3 of the above value.

(Three-phase three-wire delta

 connection 400V60Hz)

Example of leakage current per 1km during 

the commercial power supply operation 

when the CV cable is routed in metal conduit

Example of leakage current of three-

phase induction motor during the 

commercial power supply operation

(Totally-enclosed fan-cooled

 type motor 400V60Hz)

Leakage currents (mA)

Leakage currents (mA)

Cable size (mm

2

)

Noise

filter

Inverter

ELB

Ig1

Ign

Ig2

Igm

IM

3

φ

200V2.2kW

Igi

5.5mm

2

    50m

5.5mm

2

    5m

Breaker Designed for 

Harmonic and Surge 

Suppression

Standard Breaker

Leakage current 
Ig1 (mA)

33 

5m

 = 0.17

1,000m

Leakage current 
Ign (mA)

0 (without noise filter)

Leakage current 
Igi (mA)

1

Leakage current 
Ig2 (mA)

33 

50m

 = 1.65

1,000m

Motor leakage 
current Igm (mA)

0.18

Total leakage 
current (mA)

3.00

6.66

Rated sensitivity 
current (mA) 
(

Ig10)

30

100


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

87

Precautions for Operation/Selection

Safety Precautions

To operate the inverter correctly and safely, be sure to read the
"instruction manual" before starting operation.

This product has not been designed or manufactured for use
with any equipment or system operated under life-threatening
conditions.

Please contact our sales office when you are considering using
this product in special applications such as passenger mobile,
medical, aerospace, nuclear, power or undersea relay
equipment or system.

Although this product is manufactured under strict quality
control, safety devices should be installed when a serious
accident or loss is expected by a failure of this product.

The load used should be a three-phase induction motor only.

A magnetic contactor (MC) provided on the input side should
not be used to make frequent starts and stops. It could cause
the inverter to fail.

However, at this time, the motor cannot be brought to a sudden
stop. Hence, provide a mechanical stopping/holding mechanism
for the machine/equipment which requires an emergency stop.

It will take time for the capacitor to discharge after shutoff of the
inverter power supply. When accessing the inverter for
inspection, wait for at least 10 minutes after the power supply
has been switched off, and check to make sure that there are no
residual voltage using a tester or the like.

Application of power to the output terminals (U, V, W) of the
inverter will damage the inverter. Therefore, fully check the
wiring and sequence to ensure that wiring is correct, etc. before
power-ON.

Terminals P/+, PR, P1, and N/- are for connection to dedicated
options and DC power supplies. Do not connect anything other
than a dedicated option and DC power supply. 
Do not short the frequency setting power supply terminal 10 and
common terminal 5 or the terminal PC and terminal SD.

To remove the wire connected to the control circuit terminal on
the safety stop function model, pull the wire while pressing down
the open/close button firmly with a flathead screwdriver.
Otherwise, the terminal block may be damaged.

When the inverter is connected
under a large-capacity power
transformer (500kVA or more
transformer) or when a power
capacitor is to be switched over,
an excessive peak current may
flow in the power input circuit,
damaging the inverter.
Also when connecting a single-phase 100V power input inverter
to a power transformer (50kVA or more), install a AC reactor
(FR-HAL) so that the performance is more reliable.
To prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).

If a surge voltage occurs in the power supply system, this surge
energy may flow into the inverter, causing the inverter to display
overvoltage protection (E.OV) and come to an inverter trip. To
prevent this, always install an optional AC reactor (FR-HAL).

Avoid hostile environment where oil mist, fluff, dust particles,
etc. are suspended in the air, and install the inverter in a clean
place or put it in an ingress-protected "enclosed" enclosure.
When placing the inverter in an enclosure, determine the
cooling system and enclosure dimensions so that the
surrounding air temperature of the inverter is within the
permissible value. (refer to page 12 for the specified value)

Do not install the inverter on wood or other flammable material
as it will be hot partly.

Install the inverter in the vertical orientation.

The inverter can be operated as fast as a maximum of 400Hz by
parameter setting. Therefore, incorrect setting can cause a
danger. Set the upper limit using the maximum frequency limit
setting function.

A setting higher than the initial value of DC injection brake
operation  voltage or operation time can cause motor overheat
(electronic thermal relay error).

Do not set Pr. 70 Special regenerative brake duty except for using
the optional brake resistor. This function is used to protect the
brake resistor from overheating. Do not set the value exceeding
permissible duty of the brake resistor.

Precautions for use of the inverter

Operation

Wiring

Power supply

Installation

Setting

500

0

1000

1500

Range 
requiring 
installation 
of the reactor

10

Wiring length (m)

Power  
supply  

system  

capacity 

(kVA)


background image

88

When operating a special motor or more than one motor in
parallel with a single inverter, select the inverter capacity so that
1.05 times the total rated motor current is less than the rated
output current of the inverter.

Setting 2kHz or more in Pr. 72 PWM frequency selection to perform
low acoustic noise operation with the surrounding air
temperature exceeding 40

C, decrease the output current

according to the rating table on page 10. (Also change the Pr. 9
Electronic thermal O/L relay 
setting.)

The start and acceleration characteristics of the motor driven by
the inverter are restricted by the overload current rating of that
inverter. Generally the torque characteristic is less than when
the motor is started by a commercial power supply. If torque
boost adjustment, Advanced magnetic flux vector control, or
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control cannot provide
enough torque when a large starting torque is necessary, select
the inverter of one rank higher capacity or increase the
capacities of both the motor and inverter. 

The acceleration/deceleration time of the motor depends on the
motor-generated torque, load torque and moment of inertia of
the load (J).

When the torque limit function or stall prevention function is
activated during acceleration/deceleration, increase the
acceleration/deceleration time as the actual time may become
longer.

To decrease the acceleration/deceleration time, increase the
torque boost value (setting of a too large value may activate the
stall prevention function at a start, longer the acceleration time),
use the advanced magnetic flux vector control or general-
purpose magnetic flux vector control or increase the inverter
and motor capacities. To decrease the deceleration time, it is
necessary to add optional brake resistor MRS type, MYS type, 
or FR-ABR (for the 0.4K or higher), the brake unit (FR-BU2),
power regeneration common converter (FR-CV), or a similar
device to absorb braking energy.

When an oil-lubricated gear box, speed change/reduction gear
or similar device is used in the power transfer system, note that
continuous operation at low speed only may deteriorate oil
lubrication, causing seizure. When performing fast operation at
higher than 60Hz, fully note that such operation will cause
strength shortage due to the noise, life or centrifugal force of the
power transfer mechanism.

When performing operation of frequent start/stop of the inverter,
rise/fall in the temperature of the transistor element of the
inverter will repeat due to a repeated flow of large current,
shortening the life from thermal fatigue. Since thermal fatigue is
related to the amount of current, the life can be increased by
reducing current at locked condition, starting current, etc.
Decreasing current may increase the life. However, decreasing
current will result in insufficient torque and the inverter may not
start. Therefore, choose the inverter which has enough
allowance for current.

Precautions for selection

Inverter capacity selection

Starting torque of the motor

Acceleration/deceleration times

Power transfer mechanism 

(reduction 

gear, belt, chain, etc.)

Instructions for overload operation


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

89

Precautions for Peripheral Device Selection

Install a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) on the power
receiving side to protect the wiring of the inverter input side. For
MCCB selection, refer to page 85 since it depends on the inverter
power supply side power factor (which changes depending on the
power supply voltage, output frequency and load). Especially for a
completely electromagnetic MCCB, one of a slightly large capacity
must be selected since its operation characteristic varies with
harmonic currents. (Check it in the data of the corresponding
breaker.) As an earth leakage current breaker, use the Mitsubishi
Electric earth leakage current breaker designed for harmonics and
surge suppression. (Refer to page 86)
When installing a molded case circuit breaker on the output side of
the inverter, contact each manufacturer for selection of the molded
case circuit breaker.

For operation via external terminal (terminal STF or STR used), 
provide an input side MC to prevent an accident caused by a 
natural restart at power recovery after a power failure, such as 
an instantaneous power failure, and to ensure safety for 
maintenance work. Do not use this magnetic contactor to make 
frequent starts and stops. (The switching life of the inverter input 
circuit is about 1,000,000 times.) For parameter unit operation, 
an automatic restart after power failure is not made and the MC 
cannot be used to make a start. Note that the primary side MC 
may be used to make a stop but the regenerative brake specific 
to the inverter does not operate and the motor is coasted to a 
stop.

Installation of a magnetic contactor at the input side is 
recommended. A magnetic contactor  avoids overheat or 
burnout of a brake resistor when heat capacity of the resistor is 
insufficient or a brake regenerative transistor is damaged with 
short while connecting an optional brake resistor. In this case, 
shut-off the magnetic contactor when fault occurs and inverter 
trips.

Switch the magnetic contactor between the inverter and motor
only when both the inverter and motor are at a stop. When the
magnetic contactor is turned on while the inverter is operating,
overcurrent protection of the inverter and such will activate. When
an MC is provided for switching to the commercial power supply,
for example, switch it on/off after the inverter and motor have
stopped.

The inverter has an electronic thermal relay function to protect the
motor from overheating. However, when running multiple motors
with one inverter or operating a multi-pole motor, provide a thermal
relay (OCR) between the inverter and motor. In this case, set the
electronic thermal relay function of the inverter to 0A. And for the
setting of the thermal relay, add the line-to line leakage current
(refer to page 90) to the current value on the motor rating plate.
For low-speed operation where the cooling capability of the motor
reduces, it is recommended to use a thermal relay protector
incorporated motor.

When the inverter-to-motor wiring length is large, especially in the
400V class small-capacity models, the meters and CTs may generate
heat due to line-to-line leakage current. Therefore, choose the
equipment which has enough allowance for the current rating.

The power factor improving capacitor and surge suppressor on the
inverter output side may be overheated or damaged by the
harmonic components of the inverter output. Also, since an
excessive current flows in the inverter to activate overcurrent
protection, do not install a capacitor or surge suppressor. For
power factor improvement, use a DC reactor (refer to page 78).

When a motor is driven by the inverter, axial voltage is 
generated on the motor shaft, which may cause electrical 
corrosion of the bearing in rare cases depending on the wiring, 
load, operating conditions of the motor or specific inverter 
settings (high carrier frequency, use of a capacitive filter

).

Contact your sales representative to take appropriate 
countermeasures for the motor.
The following shows examples of countermeasures for the 
inverter.

Decrease the carrier frequency.

Remove the capacitive filter.

Provide a common mode choke

 on the output side of the

inverter. (This is effective regardless of the use of the capacitive
filter.)

 Mitsubishi Electric capacitive filter: FR-BIF, SF

, FR-E5NF-

, FR-

S5NFSA

, FR-BFP2-

 Recommended common mode choke: FT-3KM F series FINEMET

®

common mode choke cores manufactured by Hitachi Metals, Ltd.
FINEMET is a registered trademark of Hitachi Metals, Ltd.

When the wiring length between the inverter and motor is long,
use thick wires so that the voltage drop of the main circuit cable is
2% or less especially at low frequency output. (A selection
example for the wiring distance of 20m is shown on page 85)
Especially at a long wiring distance, the maximum wiring length
should be within the length in the table below since the overcurrent
protection function may be misactivated by the influence of a
charging current due to the stray capacitances of the wiring.
(The overall wiring length for connection of multiple motors should
be within the value in the table below.)

When using the automatic restart after instantaneous power failure
function with wiring length exceeding 100m, select without
frequency search (Pr. 162 = "1, 11").
Use the recommended connection cable when connecting the
parameter unit.
For remote operation via analog signal, wire the control cable
between the operation box or operation signal and inverter within
30m and away from the power circuits (main circuit and relay
sequence circuit) to prevent induction from other devices.
When using the external potentiometer instead of the parameter
unit to set the frequency, use a shielded or twisted cable, and do
not earth (ground) the shield, but connect it to terminal 5 as shown
below.

Installation and selection of 

molded case circuit breaker

Handling of the inverter input side 

magnetic contactor

Handling of the inverter output 

side magnetic contactor

Thermal relay installation

Measuring instrument on the 

output side

Disuse of power factor improving 

capacitor (power capacitor)

Electrical corrosion of the bearing

Wire thickness and wiring distance

Pr. 72 Setting

(carrier frequency)

0.1K

0.2K

0.4K

0.75K

1.5K

2.2K

3.7K or 

higher

1 or less

100V, 

200V

200m 200m 300m

500m

500m 500m 500m

400V

200m

200m

300m 500m 500m

2 to 15

100V, 

200V

30m

100m 200m

300m

500m 500m 500m

400V

30m

100m

200m 300m 500m

Twisted 
 cable

Frequency setting
potentiometer

(3)

(1)

(2)

10(10E)

2

5

 

 

 

Shielded cable

(3)

(2)

(1)

10(10E)

2

5

Frequency setting
potentiometer


background image

90

When the inverter is run in the low acoustic noise mode, more
leakage currents occur than in the non-low acoustic noise mode
due to high-speed switching operation. Be sure to earth (ground)
the inverter and motor before use. In addition, always use the
earth (ground) terminal of the inverter to earth (ground) the
inverter. (Do not use the case and chassis)

When performing low-noise operation at higher carrier frequency,
electromagnetic noise tends to increase. Therefore, refer to the
following measure example and consider taking the measures.
Depending on the installation condition, the inverter may be
affected by noise in a non-low noise (initial) status.

The noise level can be reduced by decreasing the carrier 
frequency (Pr. 72).

As measures against AM radio broadcasting noise, radio noise 
filter FR-BIF produces an effect.

As measures against  sensor malfunction, line noise filter FR-
BSF01, FR-BLF produces an effect.

As measures against induction noise from the power cable of 
the inverter, an effect is produced by putting a distance of 30cm 
(at least 10cm) or more and using a twisted pair shielded cable 
as a signal cable. Do not earth (ground) shield but connect it to 
signal common cable.

Capacitances exist between the inverter I/O cables, other cables
and earth and in the motor, through which a leakage current flows.
Since its value depends on the static capacitances, carrier
frequency, etc., low acoustic noise operation at the increased
carrier frequency of the inverter will increase the leakage current.
Therefore, take the following measures. Select the earth leakage
current breaker according to its rated sensitivity current,
independently of the carrier frequency setting. (Refer to page 86)

To-earth (ground) leakage currents

Line leakage current

Harmonic suppression guideline

Inverters have a converter section (rectifier circuit) and generate a
harmonic current.
Harmonic currents flow from the inverter to a power receiving point
via a power transformer. The harmonic suppression guideline was
established to protect other consumers from these outgoing
harmonic currents.
The three-phase 200V input specifications 3.7kW or less (single-
phase 200V power input model 2.2kW or less, single-phase 100V
power input model 0.75kW) are previously covered by "Harmonic
suppression guideline for household appliances and general-
purpose products" and other models are covered by "Harmonic
suppression guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or
special high voltage". However, the transistorized inverter has
been excluded from the target products covered by "Harmonic
suppression guideline for household appliances and general-
purpose products" in January 2004 and "Harmonic suppression
guideline for household appliances and general-purpose products"
was repealed on September 6, 2004.
All capacity and all models of general-purpose inverter used by
specific consumers are covered by "Harmonic suppression
guideline for consumers who receive high voltage or special high
voltage".

"Harmonic suppression guideline for consumers who receive high
voltage or special high voltage"
This guideline sets forth the maximum values of harmonic currents
outgoing from a high-voltage or especially high-voltage consumer
who will install, add or renew harmonic generating equipment. If any
of the maximum values are exceeded, this guideline requires the
consumer to take certain suppression measures.
Users who use models other than the target models are not covered
by the guideline. However, we ask to connect an AC reactor or a DC
reactor as before to the users who are not covered by the guideline.
For compliance to the harmonic suppression guideline for
consumers who receive high voltage or special high voltage

Earth (Ground)

Noise

Leakage currents

Type

Influence and Measures

Influence and 
measures

Leakage currents may flow not only into the inverter's 
own line but also into the other line through the earth 
(ground) cable, etc. These leakage currents may 
operate earth (ground) leakage circuit breakers and 
earth leakage relays unnecessarily.

Countermeasures

If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 
72 PWM frequency selection 
setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-
PWM operation selection
 to make the sound inoffensive.

By using earth leakage circuit breakers designed for 
harmonic and surge suppression in the inverter's own 
line and other line, operation can be performed with the 
carrier frequency kept high (with low noise).

Undesirable 
current path

Inverter

Sensor

Use 4-core cable for motor 
power cable and use one 
cable as earthing cable.

Use a twisted pair shielded cable

Inverter
power
supply

Control
power
supply

Do not earth (ground) shield but 
connect it to signal common cable.

Enclosure

Decrease
carrier frequency

Motor

IM

FR-
BSF01

FR-
BSF01

FR-
BIF

Do not earth (ground) 
enclosure directly.

Do not earth (ground) control cable.

Separate inverter and power
line by more than 30cm (at
least 10cm) from sensor circuit.

Install common mode filter

on inverter output side.

FR- BLF

FR- BSF01

Install capacitor type FR-BIF filter
on inverter input side.

Install common mode filter

on inverter input side.

FR- BLF

FR- BSF01

Power
supply

for sensor

Noise reduction examples

Power 
supply

Leakage 
breaker

Leakage 
breaker

NV1

NV2

Inverter

Motor

Motor

C

C

C

Type

Influence and Measures

Influence and 

measures

• This leakage current flows via a static capacitance 

between the inverter output cables.

• The external thermal relay may be operated 

unnecessarily by the harmonics of the leakage current. 
When the wiring length is long (50m or more) for the 
400V class small capacity model (7.5kW or less), the 
external thermal relay is likely to operate unnecessarily 
because the ratio of the leakage current to the rated 
motor current increases.

Countermeasures

• Use Pr.9 Electronic thermal O/L relay.
• If the carrier frequency setting is high, decrease the Pr. 

72 PWM frequency selection setting.
Note that motor noise increases. Select Pr. 240 Soft-PWM 
operation selection 
to make the sound inoffensive.
To ensure that the motor is protected against line-to-
line leakage currents, it is recommended to use a 
temperature sensor to directly detect motor 
temperature.

Undesirable 
current path

Power
supply

Thermal relay

Line-to-line static
capacitances

MCCB

MC

Line-to-line leakage currents path

Motor

Inverter

IM


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

91

For compliance to "Harmonic suppression guideline of the
transistorized inverter (input current of 20A or less) for consumers
other than specific consumers" published by JEMA.

Calculation of outgoing harmonic current

Input 

Power 

Supply

Target 

Capacity

Countermeasures

Single-phase 
100V
Single-phase 
200V
Three-phase 
200V
Three-phase 
400V

All 
capacities

Make a judgment based on "Harmonic 
suppression guideline for consumers who 
receive high voltage or special high voltage" 
issued by the Japanese Ministry of Economy, 
Trade and Industry (formerly Ministry of 
International Trade and Industry) in 
September 1994 and take measures if 
necessary. For calculation method of power 
supply harmonics, refer to materials below.
Reference materials

"Harmonic suppression measures of the 
inverter"
Jan. 2004 Japan Electrical Manufacturer's 
Association

"Calculation method of harmonic current of 
the general-purpose inverter used by 
specific consumers"
JEM-TR201 (revised in Dec. 2003): Japan 
Electrical Manufacturer's Association
Japan Electrical Manufacturer's Association

Input 

Power 

Supply

Target 

Capacity

Countermeasures

Single-phase 
100V

0.75kW or less

Connect the AC reactor or DC reactor 
recommended in a catalog or an 
instruction manual.
Reference materials

"Harmonic suppression guideline of 
the general-purpose inverter (input 
current of 20A or less)"
JEM-TR226 (revised in Dec. 2003): 
Japan Electrical Manufacturer's 
Association

Single-phase 
200V

2.2kW or less

Three-phase 
200V

3.7kW or less

Outgoing harmonic current = fundamental wave current (value converted 
from received power voltage) 

 operation ratio  harmonic content

Operation ratio: Operation ratio = actual load factor  operation 

time ratio during 30 minutes

Harmonic content: Found in Table.

Table 1: Harmonic Contents (Values at the fundamental current of 100%)

Reactor

5th

7th

11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

Three-phase 
bridge
(Capacitor 
smoothing)

Not used

65

41

8.5

7.7

4.3

3.1

2.6

1.8

Used 
(AC side)

38

14.5

7.4

3.4

3.2

1.9

1.7

1.3

Used 
(DC side)

30

13

8.4

5.0

4.7

3.2

3.0

2.2

Used 
(AC, DC sides)

28

9.1

7.2

4.1

3.2

2.4

1.6

1.4

Single-phase 
bridge
(capacitor 
smoothing, 
double voltage 
rectification)

Not used

50

24

5.1

4.0

1.5

1.4

-

-

Used 
(AC side)

6.0

3.9

1.6

1.2

0.6

0.1

-

-

Single-phase 
bridge 
(capacitor 
smoothing, full-
wave 
rectification)

Not used

60

33.5

6.1

6.4

2.6

2.7

1.5

1.5

Used 
(AC side)

31.9

8.3

3.8

3.0

1.7

1.4

1.0

0.7

Table 2: Rated Capacities and Outgoing Harmonic Currents for Three-phase 

Inverter Drive

Ap

p

lied

Mo

to

r k

W

Fundamental 

Wave 

Current (A)

Fun

da

m

ent

al

 W

av

e C

ur

re

nt

 C

on

ve

rte

fr

om

 6

.6

kV (m

A

)

Ra

te

d

 Ca

p

a

c

it

(k

V

A

)

Outgoing Harmonic Current Converted from 

6.6kV (mA)

(No reactor, 100% operation ratio)

200V 400V

5th

7th

11th 13th 17th 19th 23rd 25th

0.4

1.61

0.81

49

0.57 31.85 20.09 4.165 3.773 2.107 1.519 1.274 0.882

0.75

2.74

1.37

83

0.97 53.95 34.03 7.055 6.391 3.569 2.573 2.158 1.494

1.5

5.50

2.75

167

1.95 108.6 68.47 14.20 12.86 7.181 5.177 4.342 3.006

2.2

7.93

3.96

240

2.81 156.0 98.40 20.40 18.48 10.32 7.440 6.240 4.320

3.7

13.0

6.50

394

4.61 257.1 161.5 33.49 30.34 16.94 12.21 10.24 7.092

5.5

19.1

9.55

579

6.77 376.1 237.4 49.22 44.58 24.90 17.95 15.05 10.42

7.5

25.6

12.8

776

9.07 504.4 318.2 65.96 59.75 33.37 24.06 20.18 13.97

11

36.9

18.5

1121

13.1 728.7 459.6 95.29 86.32 48.20 34.75 29.15 20.18

15

49.8

24.9

1509 17.6 980.9 618.7 128.3 116.2 64.89 46.78 39.24 27.16

Table 3: Conversion Factors

Classification

Circuit Type

Conversion 

Factor Ki

3

Three-phase bridge

(Capacitor smoothing)

Without reactor

K31 = 3.4

With reactor (AC side)

K32 = 1.8

With reactor (DC side)

K33 = 1.8

With reactors (AC, DC sides)

K34 = 1.4

4

Single-phase bridge 

(capacitor smoothing, 

double voltage 

rectification)

Without reactor

K41 = 2.3

With reactor (AC side)

K42 = 0.35

Single-phase bridge 

(capacitor smoothing, 
full-wave rectification)

Without reactor

K43 = 2.9

With reactor (AC side)

K44 = 1.3

5

Self-excitation three-

phase bridge

When a high power factor 

converter is used

K5 = 0


background image

92

Application to Motor

The motor operated by the inverter has a limit on the continuous
operating torque since it is slightly higher in temperature rise than the
one operated by a commercial power supply. At a low speed, reduce
the output torque of the motor since the cooling effect decreases.
When 100% torque is needed continuously at low speed, consider
using a constant-torque motor. (Refer to page 93)

The motor operated by the inverter may be less in motor torque
(especially starting torque) than the one driven by the commercial
power supply. It is necessary to fully check the load torque
characteristic of the machine.

The machine-installed motor operated by the inverter may be slightly
greater in vibration than the one driven by the commercial power supply.
The possible causes of vibration are as follows.
1. Vibration due to imbalance of the rotator itself including the machine
2. Resonance due to the natural oscillation of the mechanical system.

Caution is required especially when the machine used at constant
speed is operated at variable speed. The frequency jump function
allows resonance points to be avoided during operation.(During
acceleration/deceleration, the frequency within the set area is
passed through.) An effect is also produced if Pr. 72 PWM frequency
selection  
is changed. When a two-pole motor is operated at higher
than 60Hz, caution should be taken since such operation may cause
abnormal vibration.

When the Mitsubishi Electric standard squirrel-cage motor (SF-JR, 4-pole) and inverter of the same capacity are used, the torque characteristics are as
shown below.

Continuous operation torque is for checking the limit of permissible load torque when using the motor within the permissible ambient temperature,
and is not the motor output torque itself. Maximum torque for short time is the amount of torque a motor can output.
Continuous operation torque of a single-phase 100V power input model is 90% of the continuous operation torque indicated above. 

Depending on the motor capacity or the number of motor poles, the operation at 60Hz or more may not be performed. Make sure to check the
permissible maximum operating frequency of the motor.

A 60Hz torque reference indicates that the rated torque of the motor run at 60Hz is 100%, and a 50Hz torque reference indicates that the rated
torque of the motor run at 50Hz is 100%.

To operate continuously with the 50Hz torque reference, reduce the load torque to 85% or less.

Under V/F control, same torque characteristic applies to the SF-JR type with 2, 4, and 6 poles. 

Application to standard motors

Motor loss and temperature rise

Torque characteristic

Vibration

Motor torque

60Hz Torque Reference



50Hz Torque Reference



Adva

nce

d

 m

agn

et

ic

 f

lux ve

ct

or

 c

ont

ro

l

V/F co

nt

ro



20

3

6

30

40

60

120

Output frequency (Hz)

85

80

95

100

150

200

70
63

50
45

0

Output torque (%)

Maximum torque for short time 
(0.1K to 3.7K)

Maximum torque for short time 
(5.5K to 15K)

200V

220V

0.5

Continuous operation torque *1 
(0.1K to 3.7K)

Continuous operation torque *1 (5.5K)

Continuous operation torque *1 (7.5K to 15K)

20

3

6

30

40

50

120

Output frequency (Hz)

70
65

80

85

130

170

60
53

38

0

Maximum torque for short time (0.1K to 3.7K)

Maximum torque for short time 
(5.5K to 15K)

0.5

Output torque (%)

Continuous operation torque *1 
(0.1K to 3.7K)

Continuous operation torque *1 (5.5K)

Continuous operation torque *1 (7.5K to 15K)

150
140

100

 90
 80
 70

 50

 35
 30

When boost is increased

Maximum torque at initial setting (boost setting)

Maximum torque 
for short time 

220V

200V

Continuous operation torque *1

3 6

20

30

60

120

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque (%)

130

120

 85
 75
 70
 65

 45
 38

 30
 25

When boost is increased

Maximum torque at initial setting (boost setting)

3 6

20

30

50

120

Maximum torque 
for short time 

Continuous operation  
torque *1

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque (%)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

93

Continuous operation with 100% torque even at low speed of 3Hz is
possible
Load torque is not need to be reduced even at a low speed and
constant torque (100% torque) continuous operation is possible
within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60Hz). (The characteristic
of motor running at 60Hz or more is that output torque is constant.)
Continuous operation torque of a single-phase 100V power input
model is 90% of the indicated value.

Installation size is the same as that of the standard motor

Note that operation characteristic in the chart below cannot be
obtained if V/F control is employed.

 Torque characteristic (during advanced magnetic flux vector control, and initial value for other parameters)

 * Please contact us separately when 150% or more of maximum torque for short time is necessary.

When rapid acceleration/deceleration is needed, the inverter capacity may need to be one rank higher.

When two or more motors are operated in parallel, torque imbalance is likely to occur as motor slip is smaller than that of the standard motor.

Application to constant-torque motors

SF-HRCA type

(Advanced magnetic flux vector 

control)

Standard specifications 
(indoor type)

Output 

(kW)

Number 

of Poles

Frequency 

Range

Common Specifications

0.2

4

3 to 120Hz

Standard frequency 60Hz

 rotation direction (CCW) is 

counterclockwise when 
viewed from the motor end

Lead wire

3.7kW or less ..... 3 wires
5.5kW or more  ... 6 or 12 

wires

Surrounding air temperature: 

40

C maximum

Protective structure is IP44

0.4

0.75

1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5

11

3 to 100Hz

15

60Hz Torque Reference

(when inverter is 0.2kW to 7.5kW)

60Hz Torque Reference

(when inverter is 11kW or 15kW)

Values in parenthesis apply to the 0.2kW to 0.75kW

150

100

70(60)

63(50)
50(45)

45(40)

0

3

0.5

60

120

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous operation torque

220V

200V

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

57

150

100

85

80

60

0

3

60

100

220V

200V

0.5

Maximum torque for short time

Continuous operation torque

Output frequency (Hz)

Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)


background image

94

Wide constant torque range even with the standard type (when
using advanced magnetic flux vector control)
Load torque is not need to be reduced even at a low speed and
constant torque (100% torque) continuous operation is possible
within the range of speed ratio 1/20 (3 to 60Hz). (0.1K to 0.75K)

Wide speed control range
The motor can be used in the wide speed deviation range of 3 to
120Hz
The characteristic of motor running at 60Hz or more is that output
torque is constant. (0.1K to 0.75K)

Note that the following operating characteristics are not achieved

under V/F control.

Torque characteristic (range during advanced magnetic flux vector control)

Application to geared motor

GM-S, GM-D, GM-SSY, GM-SHY series

Standard specifications

Inverter 

Type

Output 

(kW)

Number 

of Poles

Available 

Frequency Range

(base frequency 

60Hz)

Constant Torque 

Range When Using 

Advanced Magnetic 

Flux Vector Control

Grease 

Lubrication

Oil 

Lubrication

GM-S
GM-SSY
GM-SHY

0.1 to 

2.2

4

3 to 120Hz

3 to 60Hz

(0.1kW to 0.75kW)

6 to 60Hz

(1.5kW, 2.2kW)

GM-D

0.4 to 

2.2

3 to 120Hz

25 to 

120Hz

3 to 60Hz

(0.4kW, 0.75kW)

6 to 60Hz

(1.5kW, 7.5kW)

3.7
5.5

7.5

25 to 

115Hz

(when 0.1kW to 0.75kW)

(when 1.5kW to 7.5kW)

0

0.0

50.0

100.0

150.0

200.0

250.0

20

40

60

80

100

120

36

70.0

50.0

Output frequency (Hz)

Maximum torque  
for short time

Continuous operation  
torque

Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)

1.5kW to 3.7kW

5.5kW, 7.5kW

1.5kW to 3.7kW

5.5kW, 7.5kW

0

10

0.0

50.0

30.0

100.0

150.0

200.0

170.0

250.0

20

40

60

80

100

120

36

70.0

50.0

Output frequency (Hz)

Maximum torque  
for short time

Continuous operation  
torque

Output torque (%) (60 Hz is standard)


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

95

When driving a 400V class motor by the inverter, surge voltages attributable to the wiring constants may occur at the motor terminals, deteriorating the
insulation of the motor. In such a case, consider taking the following measures.

(1) Rectifying the motor insulation

1. Use a "400V class inverter driven insulation-enhanced motor".

Note: The four poles of the Mitsubishi Electric standard motor (SF-JR, SB-JR) have the 400V class inverter driving insulation enhanced
feature.

2. For the dedicated motor such as the constant-torque motor and low-vibration motor, use the "inverter-driven, dedicated motor".

(2) Suppressing the surge voltage on the inverter side

Connect a filter on the secondary side of the inverter to suppress a surge voltage so that the terminal voltage of the motor is 850V or less. When
driving by the Mitsubishi Electric inverter, connect an optional surge voltage suppression filter (FR-ASF-H/FR-BMF-H) on the inverter output side.

Use the motor with brake having independent power supply for the
brake, connect the brake power supply to the inverter input side
power and make the inverter output off using the output stop
terminal (MRS) when the brake is applied (motor stop). A rattle may
be heard depending on the type of the brake in the low speed region
but it is not a fault.

As this motor differs in rated current from the standard motor,
confirm the maximum current of the motor and select the inverter.
Be sure to change the number of poles after the motor has stopped.
If the number of poles is changed during rotation, the regenerative
overvoltage protection circuit may be activated to cause an inverter
alarm, coasting the motor to a stop.

Since the motor rated current is larger than that of the standard
motor, make selection of the inverter capacity carefully. In addition,
the wiring distance between the motor and inverter may become
longer, refer to page 85 to perform wiring with a cable thick enough.
Leakage current may flow more than the land motor, take care when
selecting the earth leakage current breaker.

To drive an explosion-proof type motor in Japan, an explosion-proof
test of the motor and inverter together is necessary. The test is also
necessary when driving an existing explosion-proof motor. Please
contact us for the FR-B, B3 series, which has passed an explosion-
proof test. The inverter is an non-explosion proof structure, install it
in a safe location.

The continuous operating rotation range of this motor changes
depending on the lubrication system and maker. Especially in the
case of oil lubrication, continuous operation in the low-speed range
only can cause gear seizure. For fast operation at higher than 60Hz,
please consult the motor maker.

This motor is not suitable for applications of large load variation or
impact, where out-of-sync is likely to occur. Please contact us when
using this motor because its starting current and rated current are
greater than those of the standard motor and will not rotate stably at
low speed.

The single phase motor is not suitable for variable operation by the
inverter. For the capacitor starting system, the capacitor may be
damaged due to harmonic current flowing to the capacitor. For the
deviation phase starting system and repulsion starting system, not
only output torque is not generated at low speed but it will result in
starting coil burnout due to failure of centrifugal force switch inside.
Replace with a three-phase motor for use.

Inverter-driven 400V class motor

Application to special motors

Motor with brake

Pole changing motor

Submersible motor

Explosion-proof motor

Geared motor

Synchronous motor

Single phase motor


background image

96

MEMO


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel

Parameter unit

FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective

Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension

Drawings

Connection  

example

97

FR-E500 Series Compatibility

Item

FR-E500

FR-E700

Control method

V/F control
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control

V/F control
General-purpose magnetic flux vector control
Advanced magnetic flux vector control
Optimum excitation control

Changed/cleared 

functions

Torque boost (Pr. 0) initial value
FR-E520-1.5K to 7.5K: 6%
FR-E540-1.5K to 3.7K: 6%
FR-E540-5.5K, 7.5K: 4%

FR-E720-1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC): 4%
FR-E720-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC): 3%
FR-E740-1.5K(SC) to 3.7K(SC): 4%
FR-E740-5.5K(SC), 7.5K(SC): 3%

DC injection brake operation voltage (Pr. 12) initial value
0.4K to 7.5K: 6%

0.4K to 7.5K: 4%

Frequency at 5V (10V) input (Pr. 38 
Frequency at 20mA input frequency (Pr. 39 )
Second electronic thermal O/L relay (Pr. 48 )
Shortest acceleration/deceleration mode (Pr. 60 )

Parameter number change
(Pr. 125 Terminal 2 frequency setting gain frequency)
(Pr. 126 Terminal 4 frequency setting gain frequency
)
(Pr. 51 Second electronic thermal O/L relay) 
(Pr. 60 Energy saving control selection)
(Pr. 292 Automatic acceleration/deceleration) 

Reverse rotation from the inverter operation panel

Press .

After setting "1" in Pr. 40 RUN key rotation direction 

selection , press 

.

FM terminal function selection (Pr. 54) setting
0: Output frequency (initial value), 
1: Output current,
2: Output voltage

1: Output frequency (initial value), 
2: Output current,
3: Output voltage

Second applied motor
Pr. 71 = 100 to 123

Pr. 450 Second applied motor

Terminal 2 0 to 5V, 0 to 10V selection (Pr. 73 ) setting
0: 0 to 5V (initial value),
1: 0 to 10V

Pr. 73 Analog input selection
0: 0 to 10V
1: 0 to 5V (initial value)

Operation mode selection (Pr. 79 )
Initial value  1: PU operation mode

Setting  8: Operation mode switching by external signal

Initial value 0: External operation mode is selected at 
power ON
Setting  8: deleted (X16 signal is used instead)

Setting General-purpose magnetic flux vector 
Pr. 80 

 9999

Pr. 80 

 9999, Pr. 81  9999, Pr. 800 = 30

User group 1 (16), user group 2 (16)
(Pr. 160, Pr. 173 to Pr. 175 )

User group (16) only, setting methods were partially changed
(Pr. 160, Pr. 172, Pr. 173 )

Input terminal function selection (Pr. 180 to Pr. 183 ) setting
5: STOP signal (start self-holding selection)
6: MRS signal (output stop)

Pr. 178 to Pr. 184 Input terminal function selection setting
5: JOG signal (Jog operation selection)
6: None
24: MRS signal (output stop)
25: STOP signal (start self-holding selection)

Long wiring mode
(Pr. 240 setting 10, 11)

Setting is unnecessary
(Pr. 240 setting 0, 11 are deleted)

Cooling fan operation selection (Pr. 244 ) initial setting
0: Cooling fan operates in power-on status.

1: Cooling fan on/off control valid

Stop selection (Pr. 250  setting increments
1s

0.1s

RS-485 communication control source from the PU connector
PU operation mode

Network operation mode (PU operation mode as FR-
E500 when Pr. 551 = 2)

Earth (ground) fault detection
400V class: Detects always

400V class: Detects only at a start

Inrush current limit circuit Provided for the 200V class 2.2K or higher and 400V class

Provided for the all capacity

Control terminal block

Fixed terminal block (cannot be removed) 
Screw type terminal block (Phillips screw M2.5)
The recommended blade terminal length is 7mm.

Removable terminal block 
Standard control circuit terminal model:
Screw type terminal block (Flathead screw M2 (M3 for 
terminal A, B, and C)
The recommended blade terminal length is 5mm (6mm 
for terminal A, B and C).
Safety stop function model:
Spring clamp terminal block (Fixes a wire with a 
pressure of inside spring)
The recommended blade terminal length is 10mm.

Operation panel

Removable operation panel (PA02)

Integrated operation panel (cannot be removed)

Parameter unit

FR-PU04

FR-PU07

Plug-in option

Dedicated plug-in option (installation is incompatible)

for 400V class only
FR-E5NC : CC-Link communication
FR-E5ND : DeviceNet communication
FR-E5NL : L

ON

W

ORKS 

communication

FR-A7NC E kit : CC-Link communication
FR-A7ND E kit : DeviceNet communication
FR-A7NL E kit : L

ON

W

ORKS

 communication 

Installation size

FR-E720-0.1K(SC) to 7.5K(SC), FR-E740-0.4K(SC) to 7.5K(SC), FR-E720S-0.1K(SC) to 0.75K(SC), FR-E710W-
0.1K to 0.75K are compatible in mounting dimensions


background image

98

MEMO


background image

Features

Options

Instructions

Motor

Compatibility

Warranty

Inquiry

Standard

Specifications

Operation panel Parameter unit FR Configurator

Parameter

List

Protective Functions

Explanations

of

Parameters

Terminal Connection

Diagram

Terminal Specification

Explanation

Outline

Dimension Drawings

Connection 

example

99

Warranty

When using this product, make sure to understand the warranty described below.

1. Warranty period and coverage

We will repair any failure or defect (hereinafter referred to as "failure") in our FA equipment (hereinafter referred to as the "Product")
arisen during warranty period at no charge due to causes for which we are responsible through the distributor from which you 
purchased the Product or our service provider. However, we will charge the actual cost of dispatching our engineer for an on-site repair 
work on request by customer in Japan or overseas countries. We are not responsible for any on-site readjustment and/or trial run that 
may be required after a defective unit are repaired or replaced.

[Term]

The term of warranty for Product is twelve months after your purchase or delivery of the Product to a place designated by you or 
eighteen months from the date of manufacture whichever comes first ("Warranty Period"). Warranty period for repaired Product cannot 
exceed beyond the original warranty period before any repair work.

[Limitations]

(1) You are requested to conduct an initial failure diagnosis by yourself, as a general rule. It can also be carried out by us or our

service company upon your request and the actual cost will be charged.
However, it will not be charged if we are responsible for the cause of the failure.

(2) This limited warranty applies only when the condition, method, environment, etc. of use are in compliance with the terms and

conditions and instructions that are set forth in the instruction manual and user manual for the Product and the caution label affixed
to the Product.

(3) Even during the term of warranty, the repair cost will be charged on you in the following cases;

1) a failure caused by your improper storing or handling, carelessness or negligence, etc., and a failure caused by your hardware

or software problem

2) a failure caused by any alteration, etc. to the Product made on your side without our approval
3) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable, if your equipment in which the Product is incorporated is equipped with a safety

device required by applicable laws and has any function or structure considered to be indispensable according to a common
sense in the industry

4) a failure which may be regarded as avoidable if consumable parts designated in the instruction manual, etc. are duly

maintained and replaced

5) any replacement of consumable parts (condenser, cooling fan, etc.)
6) a failure caused by external factors such as inevitable accidents, including without limitation fire and abnormal fluctuation of

voltage, and acts of God, including without limitation earthquake, lightning and natural disasters

7) a failure generated by an unforeseeable cause with a scientific technology that was not available at the time of the shipment of

the Product from our company

8) any other failures which we are not responsible for or which you acknowledge we are not responsible for

2. Term of warranty after the stop of production

(1) We may accept the repair at charge for another seven (7) years after the production of the product is discontinued. The

announcement of the stop of production for each model can be seen in our Sales and Service, etc.

(2) Please note that the Product (including its spare parts) cannot be ordered after its stop of production.

3. Service in overseas

Our regional FA Center in overseas countries will accept the repair work of the Product; however, the terms and conditions of the repair 
work may differ depending on each FA Center. Please ask your local FA center for details.

4. Exclusion of loss in opportunity and secondary loss from warranty liability

Regardless of the gratis warranty term, Mitsubishi Electric shall not be liable for compensation for:
(1) Damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi Electric.
(2) Loss in opportunity, lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi Electric products.
(3) Special damages and secondary damages whether foreseeable or not, compensation for accidents, and compensation for

damages to products other than Mitsubishi Electric products.

(4) Replacement by the user, maintenance of on-site equipment, start-up test run and other tasks.

5. Change of Product specifications

Specifications listed in our catalogs, manuals or technical documents may be changed without notice.

6. Application and use of the Product

(1) For the use of our product, its applications should be those that may not result in a serious damage even if any failure or

malfunction occurs in product, and a backup or fail-safe function should operate on an external system to product when any failure
or malfunction occurs.

(2) Our product is designed and manufactured as a general purpose product for use at general industries.

Therefore, applications substantially influential on the public interest for such as atomic power plants and other power plants of
electric power companies, and also which require a special quality assurance system, including applications for railway companies
and government or public offices are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these
applications when used.
In addition, applications which may be substantially influential to human lives or properties for such as airlines, medical treatments,
railway service, incineration and fuel systems, man-operated material handling equipment, entertainment machines, safety
machines, etc. are not recommended, and we assume no responsibility for any failure caused by these applications when used.
We will review the acceptability of the abovementioned applications, if you agree not to require a specific quality for a specific
application. Please contact us for consultation.


background image

101

100


background image

101

100


background image

Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).

Quality

Safety

Productivity

Security

Sustainability

MES interface

C Controller

Programmable
Controller

Sensor

Energy-saving

Drive

Mechatronics

FA-IT

Information

Interface

since2003

Sales and 

distribution

Operation and

maintenance

Product

design

Process

design

Procurement

Production

Supply chain

Engineering

chain

MES

SCADA

SCM

Simulator

ERP

CAD/CAM

IT system

Edge-computing

Shop floor

Data handling

Data primary processing/

analysis

Automation solutions

•Trademarks

L

ON

W

ORKS

 is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation, DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA, 

PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of 
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and 
other countries.
EtherCAT is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff Automation GmbH, Germany.
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their 
respective owners.

To ensure proper use of the products listed in 

this catalog, please be sure to read the instruction 

manual prior to use.

Safety Warning

103

102

This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by 

enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements 

and increase availability at production sites.

FA integrated solutions

reduce total cost

Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire 
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.

Supply chain

Sale, logistics,

and service

Production

and

manufacturing

iQ-Works/EZSocket

(CAD/simulation linkage)

iQ Care

(prevention, predictive maintenance,

remote maintenance service)

Product

design

Process

design

Operation/Maintenance

Engineering 

chain

Procurement

YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER

Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to 
CNC and EDM machines.

A NAME TO TRUST

Since its beginnings in 1870, some 
45 companies use the Mitsubishi 
name, covering a spectrum of 
finance, commerce and industry.

The Mitsubishi brand name is 
recognized around the world as a 
symbol of premium quality.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is 
active in space development, 
transportation, semi-conductors, 
energy systems, communications 
and information processing, audio 
visual equipment and home 
electronics, building and energy 
management and automation 
systems, and has 237 factories and 
laboratories worldwide in over 121 
countries.

This is why you can rely on 
Mitsubishi Electric automation 
solution - because we know first 
hand about the need for reliable, 
efficient, easy-to-use automation and 
control in our own factories.

As one of the world’s leading 
companies with a global turnover of 
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion), 
employing over 100,000 people, 
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource 
and the commitment to deliver the 
ultimate in service and support as 
well as the best products.

Medium voltage: VCB, VCC 

Power monitoring, energy management

Compact and Modular Controllers

Inverters, Servos and Motors

Visualisation: HMIs

Numerical Control (NC)

Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm

Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS

Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems

Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB

* Not all products are available in all countries.


background image

Overall production information is captured in addition to energy information, enabling the realization of efficient production and energy use (energy savings).

Quality

Safety

Productivity

Security

Sustainability

MES interface

C Controller

Programmable
Controller

Sensor

Energy-saving

Drive

Mechatronics

FA-IT

Information

Interface

since2003

Sales and 

distribution

Operation and

maintenance

Product

design

Process

design

Procurement

Production

Supply chain

Engineering

chain

MES

SCADA

SCM

Simulator

ERP

CAD/CAM

IT system

Edge-computing

Shop floor

Data handling

Data primary processing/

analysis

Automation solutions

•Trademarks

L

ON

W

ORKS

 is a registered trademark of Echelon Corporation, DeviceNet is a trademark of the ODVA, 

PROFIBUS is a trademark of the PROFIBUS User Organization, and MODBUS is a registered trademark of 
SCHNEIDER ELECTRIC USA, INC.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Fuji Xerox Corporation in Japan.
Windows and Windows Vista are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and 
other countries.
Other company and product names herein are the trademarks and registered trademarks of their 
respective owners.

To ensure proper use of the products listed in 

this catalog, please be sure to read the instruction 

manual prior to use.

Safety Warning

103

102

This solution solves customers' issues and concerns by 

enabling visualization and analysis that lead to improvements 

and increase availability at production sites.

FA integrated solutions

reduce total cost

Utilizing our FA and IT technologies and collaborating with e-F@ctory Alliance partners, we reduce the total cost across the entire 
supply chain and engineeringchain, and support the improvement initiatives and one-step-ahead manufacturing of our customers.

Supply chain

Sale, logistics,

and service

Production

and

manufacturing

iQ-Works/EZSocket

(CAD/simulation linkage)

iQ Care

(prevention, predictive maintenance,

remote maintenance service)

Product

design

Process

design

Operation/Maintenance

Engineering 

chain

Procurement

YOUR SOLUTION PARTNER

Mitsubishi Electric offers a wide range of automation equipment from PLCs and HMIs to 
CNC and EDM machines.

A NAME TO TRUST

Since its beginnings in 1870, some 
45 companies use the Mitsubishi 
name, covering a spectrum of 
finance, commerce and industry.

The Mitsubishi brand name is 
recognized around the world as a 
symbol of premium quality.

Mitsubishi Electric Corporation is 
active in space development, 
transportation, semi-conductors, 
energy systems, communications 
and information processing, audio 
visual equipment and home 
electronics, building and energy 
management and automation 
systems, and has 237 factories and 
laboratories worldwide in over 121 
countries.

This is why you can rely on 
Mitsubishi Electric automation 
solution - because we know first 
hand about the need for reliable, 
efficient, easy-to-use automation and 
control in our own factories.

As one of the world’s leading 
companies with a global turnover of 
over 4 trillion Yen (over $40 billion), 
employing over 100,000 people, 
Mitsubishi Electric has the resource 
and the commitment to deliver the 
ultimate in service and support as 
well as the best products.

Medium voltage: VCB, VCC 

Power monitoring, energy management

Compact and Modular Controllers

Inverters, Servos and Motors

Visualisation: HMIs

Numerical Control (NC)

Robots: SCARA, Articulated arm

Processing machines: EDM, Lasers, IDS

Transformers, Air conditioning, Photovoltaic systems

Low voltage: MCCB, MCB, ACB

* Not all products are available in all countries.


background image

L(NA)06051ENG-F(1801)MEE

HEAD OFFICE: TOKYO BLDG., 2-7-3, MARUNOUCHI, CHIYODA-KU, TOKYO 100-8310, JAPAN

Mitsubishi  Electric  Corporation  Nagoya  Works  is  a  factory  certified  for  ISO14001  (standards  for 
environmental management systems) and ISO9001(standards for quality assurance management systems).

• Top level of driving performance in compact body

• Easy operability

• Extensive option lineup

• Ensured maintenance

• Compact and space-saving

• Supporting various applications

INVERTER

FR-E700

All-rounder with a compact body
  (A lineup of Ethernet communication models)

FACTORY AUTOMATION